Printronix Printer T4204 User Manual

R
Users Manual  
T4204 Label Printer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software License Agreement  
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES  
YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO  
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN  
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN  
MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY  
WILL BE REFUNDED.  
Definitions.  
"Software" shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable data and  
program. The term "Software Product" includes the Software resident in the  
printer and its documentation. The Software Product is licensed (not sold) to  
you, and Printronix, Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own,  
all copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in the Software  
Product.  
License.  
1. Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the  
Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or  
personal purposes.  
2. Restrictions.  
a. To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc., you agree to  
maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information  
concerning the typefaces in strict confidence.  
b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product.  
c. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer all or any  
portion of the Software Product separate from the printer, without the  
prior written consent of Printronix, Inc.  
d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software  
Product.  
e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a network, by  
telephone, or electronically using any means; or reverse engineer,  
decompile or disassemble the Software.  
f. You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent  
and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized  
disclosure or use.  
3. Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the printer, but only  
if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this  
Agreement. Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the  
Software Product and printer.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited Software Product Warranty  
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software  
will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix, Inc.  
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors  
and omissions.  
Remedy  
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. in connection  
with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the  
same version and revision level.  
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies  
1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.  
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the  
Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software  
will be uninterrupted or error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to  
make changes and/or improvements in the Software without notice at any  
time.  
2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE FOR LOST  
PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY  
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED  
BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME  
STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF  
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO  
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
3. Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in  
furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this  
Agreement.  
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind  
(including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused  
solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this  
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or  
related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this  
Agreement.  
5. California law governs this Agreement.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Termination of License Agreement  
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated  
by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc. or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail  
to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected  
within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall  
return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the  
Software and documentation.  
U.S. Government Restricted Rights  
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as  
set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at  
FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as  
appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions  
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).  
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions  
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,  
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT  
OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO  
CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND  
SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH  
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
Communication Notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement: This equipment  
has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provided reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a  
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user  
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order  
to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or  
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and  
connectors or by any unauthorized changes or modifications to this  
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s  
authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement: This  
Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformite aux normes du ministere des Communcations du  
Canada: Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conform á norme NMB-  
003 du Canada.  
European Community (EC) Conformity Statement:  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council  
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Printronix cannot accept  
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting  
from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of  
non-Printronix option cards.  
German Conformity Statement:  
Zulassungsbescheinigung Gesetz über die elektromagnetische  
Verträglichkeit von Geraten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen das EG-  
Konformitätszelchen - CE - zu führen.  
Der Außteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die Printronix......(1)  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 und  
EN 55022 Klasse A.  
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte bedürfen folgender Hinweise:  
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht asreichend entstört sind,  
nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesminesters für Post und  
Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und Telekommunikation  
betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen  
Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4) Dieses  
Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der  
entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.  
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann  
im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber  
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür aufzkommen.”  
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den  
Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and  
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference  
with licensed communication equipment.  
Warning  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic  
environment this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be  
required to take adequate measures.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademark Acknowledgements  
Printronix, IGP, IGP/Auto Label Mapping, LinePrinter Plus, PGL, ThermaLine, and  
PrintNet are registered trademarks of Printronix, Inc.  
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
Code V is a trademark of QMS, Inc.  
QMS is a registered trademark of Quality Micro Systems, Inc.  
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.  
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.  
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.  
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic  
Engineers, Inc.  
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.  
EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association.  
Valeron is a registered trademark of Van Leer’s Vatenfabrieken N.V.  
Mylar and Tyvek are registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont De Nemours & Co.  
UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.  
CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.  
TUV is a registered certification mark of the TUV Rheinland of Noarth America, Inc.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT WARRANTY INFORMATION  
PRINTER WARRANTY  
Printronix® warrants to purchaser that under normal use and service, this  
printer (excluding the thermal printhead) purchased hereunder shall be free  
from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days  
from the date of shipment from Printronix.  
Consumable items such as media and ribbons are not covered under this  
warranty. This warranty does not cover equipment or parts that have been  
misused, altered, or used for purposes other than those for which they were  
manufactured. This warranty also does not cover loss, shipping damage,  
damage resulting from accident or damages resulting from unauthorized  
service.  
THERMAL PRINTHEAD  
Printronix warrants the printhead for a period of ninety (90) days, or 1,000,000  
linear inches (Thermal Transfer/Direct Thermal) of use, whichever comes  
first. The warranty does not cover printheads that have been misused,  
damaged due to improper cleaning, or damaged due to use of improper  
ribbons or media.  
SUPPLIES  
For the number of the nearest Printronix full-service distributor that carries  
Printronix genuine supplies, please call 1-800-733-1900 or fax  
714-368-2354. Supplies design, specification, and selection are critical and  
integral to the development of any computer imaging system. Printronix’s  
extensive manufacturing and research capabilities, along with years of  
experience in the design of printers and their applications, assures that you  
will receive the exact materials that you require to maximize the performance  
of your Printronix printer. Further information can be obtained by calling the  
Printronix ThermaLine Help Desk at 714-368-2488 or from the Printronix Web  
Page at www.printronix.com.  
ON-SITE MAINTENANCE SERVICE  
Printronix offers on-site support services in the United States. Please contact  
the Printronix Maintenance Contracts Group at (714) 368-2798, for detailed  
service agreement information.  
This document contains propriety information protected by copyright. No part  
of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated in  
any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,  
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of  
Printronix®.  
COPYRIGHT 2000, PRINTRONIX, INC.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
LinePrinter Plus Submenus .................................................... 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Introduction  
Printronix ThermaLine Help Desk  
The Printronix ThermaLine® Help Desk offers technical support with:  
Installation  
Configuration and Setup  
Operation and Supplies Loading  
Specifying the proper media and ribbon  
Post sales service support questions  
Call the Printronix ThermaLine Help Desk at (714) 368-2488 or visit the  
Printronix Web Page at www.printronix.com.  
Warnings And Special Information  
For your safety and to protect valuable equipment, it is very important that you  
read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:  
WARNING  
WARNUNG  
Conditions that could harm you as well as damage the equipment.  
Achten Sie auf folgendes, um keine Personen in Gefahr zu bringen bzw.  
das Gerät zu beschädigen.  
AVISO  
Condiciones que pueden causar daños a personas y equipos.  
AVERTISSEMENT  
Conditions à respecter pour éviter tout danger corporel et dommage  
matériel.  
AVVERTENZA  
Condizioni che possono arrecare danni alle persone e alle  
apparecchiature.  
CAUTION  
Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.  
IMPORTANT  
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.  
NOTE: Information and helpful tips about printer operation.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
1
The T4204 Label Printer  
Conventions  
Throughout this manual, keys and possible key settings or positions are  
printed in UPPERCASE type.  
In most cases, messages displayed in the liquid crystal display (LCD) are  
shown in the following format:  
PRINTER CONTROL  
Print Speed  
The T4204 Label Printer  
The T4204 is a high quality, direct thermal and thermal transfer printer  
specifically designed for printing labels and tags, from any MS-DOS®,  
Windows®, or ASCII based compatible computer.  
Features  
Thermal transfer and direct thermal printing.  
Supports over 20 types of bar codes.  
Download forms, fonts and graphics to printer memory.  
High resolution print head for sharp graphics and text.  
Built-in label rewinder for batch processing or label Peel-Off operation.  
Label Taken Sensor for detecting removal of labels in Peel-Off or Tear-  
Off modes.  
Peel-Off mode for peeling off labels one at a time, before printing the next  
label.  
Tear-Off mode for positioning the label at the tear off position and  
detecting its removal before printing the next label.  
Tear-Off Strip mode for automatically positioning the last label of the print  
job at the tear off position when the print buffer is empty.  
4MB DRAM memory.  
4MB Flash memory.  
Printronix Dynamic Print Control provides exceptional print quality. A circuit  
monitors the data to be printed and automatically adjusts the energy applied  
to the thermal printhead for maximum performance.  
The printer can be connected to communicate with the host via RS-232 and  
RS-422 serial, Centronics®-compatible parallel, IEEE® 1284 compliant  
parallel, and, optionally, coax/twinax host connections or Ethernet®  
10Base-T, or 10/100 Base-T. The interface cable needed to connect the  
printer to the host device must be supplied by the user.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Thermal Printer Technology  
Quiet and fast, with excellent print quality, the T4204 multifunction label  
printer uses an inline thermal printhead. The operation of a thermal printer is  
different from that of a line-matrix or laser printer. The thermal printer uses a  
printhead with heating elements and special paper or ribbon.  
The Printing Process  
The thermal printhead allows two modes of operation:  
Direct Thermal  
During direct thermal printing, the thermal printhead selectively heats  
small, rectangular thermal dots. When these contact the coated thermal  
paper, the dyes and developers in the coating react to the heat and  
develop an image. This mode of printing is generally used for short-term  
labeling applications.  
Thermal Transfer  
During thermal transfer printing, the heated thermal dots contact a  
thermal ribbon. The heat reacts with the ribbon and bonds the image to  
the paper. This method is used especially for abrasive, long-storage  
applications and for specialized applications, such as in extreme  
environmental conditions or where tamper-proofing is required.  
Dynamic Print Control  
Print quality largely depends on how the thermal paper or the thermal ribbon  
and thermal transfer paper responds to the heat of the thermal printhead.  
During printing, the thermal printhead must reach a set temperature in the  
shortest possible time. Then it must cool down to the original temperature in  
the shortest possible time after printing. Thus print quality is dependent on the  
precise control of the energy supplied to the thermal dots.  
The thermal printer has a unique feature that provides excellent print quality  
by preventing unevenness of print density. Unevenness is usually caused by  
the stored heat from previous dots. The Dynamic Print Control is a history  
control whose output is based on the results of the previous printing. The  
printer predicts the quantity of heat required to print dots and regulates the  
electrical energy applied to the printhead. This prevents unevenness of print  
density and results in the printing of narrow-ladder bar codes or vertical grid  
lines that are straight from the microscopic viewpoint.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
1
Media Selection  
Media Selection  
Since there are two print modes of operation, there are two kinds of thermal  
media: Direct thermal media and Thermal transfer media.  
Direct thermal media is paper coated with special chemicals that act as an  
accelerator, acceptor dye and binder. During direct thermal mode, the heat  
from the thermal printhead contacts the paper and causes a chemical reaction  
to take place.  
NOTE: Do not attempt to use direct thermal media with ribbon. The printable  
surface of direct thermal media is very slick and will fail to advance  
ribbon at the proper speed resulting in poor print quality.  
Thermal Transfer Media is paper designed to be used with a transfer ribbon.  
Once your specific label requirements are identified, you will need to select  
the ribbon and media combination that will satisfy you needs.  
NOTE: The term “media” used in this manual refers to all the different kinds  
of paper or tag stock that can be used in the printer.  
Ribbons  
You should use a Genuine Printronix Thermal Ribbon in your printer.  
Printronix offers a wide range of thermal transfer media, such as film or  
synthetic paper substitutes that are excellent in their ability to transfer an  
image (print quality) and in scratch resistance (long storage). Most of these  
media options can be die-cut for easy label applications. The wide selection of  
media sizes and face stocks have been tested with Printronix ribbons for print  
quality and usage. Consult your Genuine Printronix Supplies Catalog or  
contact the factory. Further information can be obtained by calling the  
Printronix ThermaLine Help Desk at (714) 368-2488 or from the Printronix  
Web Page at www.printronix.com.  
Emulations  
The T4204 has the standard Printronix LinePrinter Plus® (LP+) emulation  
which provides direct compatibility with Printronix P-series printers. In  
addition, the printer has co-resident Printronix IGP®/PGL® and IGP/VGL  
emulations which provide printer system commands for text, barcodes,  
graphics, lines, and boxes.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Hardware Options  
Ask your Printronix representative about the following options, which can  
enhance the versatility of your printer.  
Fonts  
A selection of fonts is available to extend the capabilities of the  
standard resident fonts.  
Media Cutter  
The cutter is used to automatically cut printed media when the media  
exits the printer.  
Label/Tag Catcher Tray  
Used with the Media Cutter option to catch the cut media and collect it  
away from the Media Cutter Assembly.  
Twinax/Coax Host Interface  
Provides connection to an IBM host computer system using a coax or  
twinax interface.  
PrintNet® Servers  
Allows the user to attach the T4204 to a LAN (Local Area Network)  
rather than attaching it directly to a host system. PrintNet servers  
support Ethernet only.  
PrintNet servers are available as an internally installed factory option,  
mounted inside the printer with the 10Base-T (UTP) connection only.  
PrintNet servers are also available as an externally mounted factory  
or field option with either a 10Base-T (UTP) or 10/100 BaseT  
connection. The external PrintNet field option is user installable and  
connects to the Centronics parallel port at the back of the T4204  
printer.  
NOTE: When the Twinax/Coax Interface option is installed and a PrintNet  
option is also required, an External PrintNet option must be used. The  
Internal PrintNet option is not supported with the Twinax/Coax  
Interface option installed.  
Labels can be designed and printed using the following:  
Printronix LP+  
Printronix IGP/PGL or IGP/VGL graphics languages  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
1
Unpacking The Printer  
Bar Code Verification  
The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure the  
bar code will be scanned properly. Incorporating a bar code quality procedure  
in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are being  
printed correctly. A properly implemented verification procedure will increase  
overall bar code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes, and  
achieve high first time read rates, which is an increasingly important factor in  
newer, more efficient systems, where manually entered data is not acceptable  
as a back up function. Verification also minimizes the costs of returned  
products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes.  
RJS designs and manufactures the world’s most complete line of bar code  
verification products, including their portable Inspector and Laser Inspector  
models, On-Line Inspector and AutoScan II series. For more information on  
RJS bar code verifiers, contact their corporate headquarters at 562-994-0930,  
or visit their web site at www.rjs1.com.  
Unpacking The Printer  
The printer is shipped in a carton and protective bag. Keep all packing  
material in case you need to move or ship the printer again. Avoid touching  
the electrical connectors to prevent electrostatic discharge damage while  
setting up the printer.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
The discharge of electrostatic energy that accumulates on the surface  
of the human body or other surfaces can damage or destroy the print  
head or electronic components used in this device.  
Damage to the printer interface connector may result from placing the  
T4204 printer on its backside during unpacking or handling.  
1. Open the top (and right side) cover by lifting the lip on the lower right side  
of the cover.  
1
Legend:  
1) Lip on lower right side of cover  
2. Remove the tape securing the label rewind clip to the label rewind  
spindle.  
3. Place the Media Roll Guide in the down position.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Remove the sample roll of Printronix ribbon and media from the support  
assembly and set them to one side.  
2
1
3
Legend:  
1) Tape securing label rewind clip  
2) Media Roll Guide  
3) Ribbon and Media Sample Rolls  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
1
Unpacking The Printer  
Check List  
Your T4204 kit contains the items listed below.  
The T4204 printer.  
AC Powercord (not illustrated)  
Programmer’s Manual Order Card (not illustrated).  
Printer User’s Manual (not illustrated).  
Printhead Cleaning Pen (not illustrated)  
Terminating Resistor Packs (not illustrated)  
Ribbon Take-Up Core (cardboard) mounted in printer.  
Label Rewind Bracket mounted in printer  
Sample Roll of Printronix Prime Wax Ribbon 4.33” x 164’  
Starter Kit Roll of Printronix 110 Media (100 4.0” x 6.0” labels)  
NOTE: If any items are missing, contact your dealer for replacement parts.  
1
2
4
3
Legend:  
1) Ribbon Take-Up Core (cardboard)  
2) Label Rewind Bracket in stored position  
3) Sample Roll of Prime Wax Ribbon  
4) Sample Roll of 110 Media  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Installation  
The following sections will guide you through the installation of the T4204.  
WARNING  
WARNUNG  
The printer should never be operated in a location where the operator  
and printer can get wet. Personal injury could result.  
Der Drucker sollte grundsätzlich nicht an einem Ort aufgestellt und  
betrieben werden, an denen der Benutzer oder der Drucker naß werden  
könnten, da dies zu Schäden führen könnte.  
AVISO  
AVERTISSEMENT  
AVVERTENZA  
La impresora nunca deberá utilizarse en un lugar en el que el operador y  
la impresora puedan sufrir los efectos de la humedad. De lo contrario,  
podrían producirse daños a personas.  
Ne faites jamais fonctionner l'imprimante dans un endroit où l'opérateur  
et l'imprimante peuvent être mouillés. Il y a risque de préjudice  
physique.  
Onde evitare il rischio di lesioni personali, non utilizzare mai la  
stampante in luoghi in cui l'operatore e la stampante possano venire a  
contatto con liquidi.  
1. Place the printer in a suitable location that allows easy access to all sides  
of the printer. The printer should never be operated while resting on its  
side or upside down.  
2. Check that the printer power switch is in the OFF (0) position.  
3. Attach the AC power cord to the AC power receptacle in the rear of the  
printer.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
1
Printer Installation  
$
1
2
3
$
Legend:  
1) AC Power Cord  
2) Power Switch Off (0) Position  
3) Power Switch On (l) Position  
WARNING  
WARNUNG  
AVISO  
Verify the required voltage on the printer’s model number label on the  
rear of the printer.  
Überprüfen Sie die erforderliche Spannung an dem Modellschild auf der  
Druckerrückseite.  
Compruebe el voltaje requerido que figura en la etiqueta del número de  
modelo de la impresora que figura en su parte posterior.  
AVERTISSEMENT  
AVVERTENZA  
Vérifiez la tension requise sur l'étiquette du numéro de série de  
l'imprimante, qui est accolée sur la partie arrière de l'imprimante.  
Verificare la tensione richiesta sulla targhetta del numero di serie posta  
sul retro della stampante.  
4. Attach the AC power cord to a grounded (three prong) electrical outlet of  
the proper voltage.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Attach The Interface Cable  
a. Parallel Interface  
Attach a suitable parallel printer cable from the computer to the  
Centronics interface connector at the back of the printer. Snap the  
bail locks to the Centronics connector to secure the interface cable to  
the printer.  
1
2
Legend:  
1) Centronics parallel interface cable  
2) Bail lock  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
1
Printer Installation  
b. Serial Interface  
Attach a suitable serial printer cable from the computer to the DB-25  
RS-232 Serial interface connector at the back of the printer. For  
additional information on serial cable wiring, refer to Chapter 4, page  
185.  
NOTE: The printer supports simultaneous connection of the Parallel and  
Serial interfaces using the Auto Switching feature. See Auto  
Switching described on page 78.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Operation  
Controls & Indicators  
All of the T4204 printer controls and indicators, except for the power switch,  
are located on the front panel of the printer, on either the Primary Control  
Panel (upper keys), or the Secondary Control Panel (lower keys).  
1
11  
2
10  
9
8
3
4
7
5
6
Legend:  
1) LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)  
2) ONLINE Status Indicator  
3) CLEAR Key  
4) PRT CONFIG Key  
5) JOB SELECT Key  
6) ENTER Key  
7) Directional “Arrow” keys (4)  
8) TEST Key  
9) CANCEL Key  
10) FEED Key  
11) PAUSE Key  
The Primary Control Panel is located at the top left of the printer, on the front  
panel. It is accessible with the printer front door either opened or closed. The  
panel has a back-lighted Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD), ONLINE status  
indicator, and PAUSE, FEED, CANCEL, and TEST keys.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
2
The POWER Switch  
The Secondary Control Panel is behind the front door assembly below the  
Primary Control Panel. It consists of UP, DOWN, PREV, and NEXT arrow  
keys to navigate through the printer configuration menus, and CLEAR, PRT  
CONFIG, JOB SELECT, and ENTER keys for performing specific functions in  
the offline mode or within the printer configuration menu.  
The POWER Switch  
The POWER SWITCH is located on the back panel of the printer, in the  
bottom left corner. Placing this switch in the ON (1) position applies power to  
the printer. An illuminated LCD Message Display indicates the printer power is  
ON.  
1
Legend:  
1) Printer Power Switch  
Powering On The Printer  
When you power on the printer, the T4204 executes a self-test. The default  
power-up state is online. Once the printer has successfully initialized, the  
ONLINE status indicator light will go on, and the LCD indicates the  
communication interface selected and the type of emulation installed. The  
interface is indicated by PARL for parallel and SERL for serial.  
If there is a fault during the self-test, the ONLINE status indicator flashes, and  
a fault message appears on the display. The alarm may also sound, if it is  
configured to do so.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Modes  
Online - In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the  
host. Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer between the online and  
offline mode. The ONLINE status indicator is lit in online mode.  
Offline - In offline mode, you may perform operator functions, such as loading  
media, or navigating through the printer configuration menu to make changes  
or verify option settings. Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer from  
offline to online mode. The ONLINE status indicator is not illuminated in offline  
mode.  
Fault - In fault mode, a fault condition exists that must be cleared before  
printing can continue. The ONLINE status indicator flashes, the alarm beeps  
(if configured to do so) and a descriptive fault message displays.  
The current operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys,  
or may result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.  
Primary Control Panel Keys  
PAUSE - Toggles the printer between online [twinax only] and offline modes.  
FEED - Advances the media one forms length (active in online or offline  
modes).  
CANCEL - Cancels all data in the printer (active in online or offline modes).  
This key is set to disable from the factory. CANCEL can be enabled in the  
MAINT/MISC menu.  
TEST - Selects the self-test menu (offline mode only). Pressing the ENTER  
key with a Diagnostic Test displayed initiates the test. Pressing the ENTER  
key again terminates the test. Press FEED to advance media and clear test  
data from the print buffer before returning the printer to the online mode.  
Secondary Control Panel Keys  
CLEAR - If a fault condition exists, pressing the CLEAR key clears the fault  
message and returns the printer to offline mode.  
NOTE: If the fault condition has not been corrected before pressing CLEAR,  
the fault message appears again when attempting to place the printer  
to online status.  
PRT CONFIG - Prints the current printer configuration menu settings.  
JOB SELECT - Selects a specific printer configuration menu (offline mode  
only).  
ENTER - Selects the current value within the printer configuration menu  
(offline mode only) and displays an asterisk (*) next to the value. If the ENTER  
key is locked, the value will not be selected and an “ENTER SWITCH  
LOCKED” message displays for one second, followed by a display of the  
previously selected value. Pressing the UP and DOWN keys at the same time  
unlocks the ENTER key and permits value selection.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
2
Loading Media  
UP (5) - Navigates the printer menu one level up (offline mode only).  
DOWN (6) - Navigates the printer menu one level down (offline mode only).  
PREV (3) - Navigates between options on the current level of the printer  
menu (offline mode only).  
NEXT (4) - Navigates between options on the current level of the printer  
menu (offline mode only).  
UP+DOWN (5+6) - Simultaneously pressing these keys unlocks or locks  
the printer menu (offline mode only).  
NEXT+PREV (4+3) - Simultaneously pressing these keys enables a printer  
soft reset (offline only).  
Loading Media  
The term “media” as used in this manual refers to all the different kinds of  
paper, label, or tag stock material that can be printed on by the printer.  
Your T4204 can print on continuous paper, adhesive backed labels or non-  
adhesive tags packaged in roll or fanfold form.  
See Appendix B for a list of supplies available from Printronix.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
DO NOT TOUCH the Printhead or the electronic components under the  
Printhead Assembly. The discharge of electrostatic energy that  
accumulates on the surface of the human body or other surfaces can  
damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this  
device.  
Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the backing liner may  
jam the printer. This can cause the label to peel off the liner. The  
exposed edges may stick to the label guides and rollers inside the  
printer. Genuine Printronix Supplies can be ordered from the Printronix  
Distributor where you purchased this printer. Please refer to Appendix B  
for sizes and part numbers.  
IMPORTANT  
If you run out of labels while printing, do not turn the power switch to  
the OFF position while reloading labels. Lost data may result. Prior to  
printing labels, it is also recommended you enable the Error Recovery  
sub-menu of the PRINTER CONTROL menu, and save it as the power-on  
default. Error Recovery forces the printer to automatically reprint a label  
that may have been partially printed prior to the LOAD PAPER fault  
message, after additional labels are properly loaded.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Roll Media  
1. Open the top (and right side) cover.  
2. Open the front door.  
3. Slide the media roll guide down to the end of the media support  
assembly.  
4. Open the printhead assembly by pushing the release lever towards the  
back of the printer. The Printhead assembly will swing upwards.  
1
5
4
2
3
Legend:  
1) Top Cover  
2) Front Door  
3) Printhead Assembly Release Lever  
4) Media Roll Guide  
5) Media Support Assembly  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
2
Loading Roll Media  
5. Slide the media width adjustment tab to the outside stop of the media  
sensor assembly and rotate the tab up.  
1
Legend:  
1) Media Width Adjustment Tab  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Slide a roll of media over the media roll guide and onto the support  
assembly. Media feeds from the top of the roll and towards the front of the  
printer. Push the roll to the back of the support and slide the roll guide  
against the outer edge of the media.  
7. Thread the label stock through the label sensor assembly and then  
between the platen (drive roller) and the printhead. You can also refer to  
the Loading A New Roll or Ribbon illustration label on the inside rear  
panel of the printer.  
1
2
Legend:  
1) Roll Guide  
2) Media Roll  
8. Rotate the media width adjustment tab down and slide it inward until it is  
flush with the media. Check the location of the media sensor, and refer to  
Sensor Assembly Horizontal Adjustment on page 47.  
1
Legend:  
1) Media Width Adjustment Tab  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Loading Roll Media  
9. Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the front of the  
printhead assembly.  
10. Adjust the media pressure control knob to match the width of the label  
stock in use.  
Pressure Control  
Media Width  
Knob Settings  
2 inches or Less  
2 inches  
4 inches  
Greater Than 2 inches  
2
1
Legend:  
1) Printhead Assembly  
2) Media Pressure Control Knob  
CAUTION  
Ensure the printhead is down and latched before attempting to print.  
Failure to do so may cause a premature failure of the printhead.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Press the FEED key once to verify that the media advances.  
Verify that Print Mode in the Printer Configuration Menu is set for the  
media type installed (Direct or Transfer). If Thermal Transfer media is  
installed, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 38. The Print Mode submenu is  
located in the PRINTER CONTROL Main Configuration menu. See  
“Printer Control Menu” on page 91 for more information. Close the  
printer’s front door and top (and side) cover if the rewind or thermal  
transfer options are not needed.  
12. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online.  
The printer is now ready for printing.  
IMPORTANT  
The printer will not automatically detect a fault condition when the  
printhead is open. When using Transmissive or Reflective media, if the  
printhead assembly is opened and media is moved, repositioned, or  
replaced, you must press the FEED key after the printhead is locked for  
media to advance to the Top-of-Form position.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Loading Fanfold Media  
Loading Fanfold Media  
1. Open the top (and right side) cover on the printer and the front door.  
2. Remove the roll media from the media support assembly, if installed.  
3. Place the fanfold media behind the printer and insert the first few labels  
through the rear panel opening.  
4. Open the printhead assembly by pushing the release lever towards the  
back of the printer. The Printhead assembly will swing upward.  
1
Legend:  
1) Printhead Assembly Release Lever  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Slide the media width adjustment tab to the outside stop of the media  
sensor assembly and rotate the tab up.  
1
Legend:  
1) Media Width Adjustment Tab  
6. Thread the media through the media sensor assembly and then between  
the platen (drive roller) and the printhead.  
3
2
1
4
Legend:  
1) Media Sensor Assembly  
2) Platen  
3) Printhead  
4) Fanfold Media  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Loading Fanfold Media  
7. Rotate the media width adjustment tab down and slide it over until it is  
flush with the fanfold media. Check the location of the media sensor, and  
1
Legend:  
1) Media Width Adjustment Tab  
8. Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the front of the  
printhead assembly.  
9. Adjust the label pressure control knob to match the width of the label  
stock in use.  
Pressure Control  
Label Width  
Knob Settings  
2 inches or Less  
2 inches  
4 inches  
Greater Than 2 inches  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
1
Legend:  
1) Printhead Assembly  
2) Label Pressure Control Knob  
CAUTION  
Ensure the printhead is down and latched before attempting to print.  
Failure to do so may cause a premature failure of the printhead.  
10. Press the FEED key once to verify that the labels advance.  
Verify that Print Mode in the Printer Configuration Menu is set for the  
media type installed (Direct or Transfer). If Thermal Transfer media is  
installed, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 38. The Print Mode submenu is  
located in the PRINTER CONTROL Main Configuration menu. See  
“Printer Control Menu” on page 91 for more information. Close the  
printer’s front door and top (and side) cover if the rewind or thermal  
transfer options are not needed.  
11. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online.  
The printer is now ready for printing.  
IMPORTANT  
The printer will not automatically detect a fault condition when the  
printhead is open. When using Transmissive or Reflective media, if the  
printhead assembly is opened and media is moved, repositioned, or  
replaced, the FEED key must be pressed after the printhead is locked for  
media to advance to the Top-of-Form position.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Loading Ribbon  
Loading Ribbon  
Skip this section when using Direct Thermal Media.  
1. Slide the appropriate thermal transfer ribbon roll onto the ribbon supply  
spindle and open the Printhead assembly by pushing the release lever  
towards the back of the printer.  
1
2
Legend:  
1) Ribbon Supply Spindle  
2) Printhead Assembly Release Lever  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Thread the transfer ribbon between the label sensor assembly and the  
printhead bracket. Continue threading the ribbon between the platen (and  
label stock, if loaded) and the printhead.  
For easy ribbon threading, slide half of the ribbon between the side of the  
label sensor assembly and the printhead bracket. Guide it from the side of  
the printer through the ribbon path.  
1
2
3
4
Legend:  
1) Ribbon Take-up Spindle  
2) Ribbon Supply Roll  
3) Printhead Bracket  
4) Label Sensor Assembly  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Loading Ribbon  
3. Wrap the transfer ribbon from the front of the printhead assembly to the  
backside of the ribbon take-up spindle. Attach the ribbon to the take-up  
core (fiberboard tube) with tape.  
When installing a new roll of Printronix ribbon, fold the ribbon just behind  
the adhesive strip and attach the strip to the ribbon take-up core.  
Manually rotate the spindle counterclockwise to feed the unusable portion  
of the ribbon leader around the take-up spindle.  
1
Legend:  
1) Label and Ribbon Loading Diagram  
4. Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the front of the  
printhead assembly.  
5. Close the printer’s front door and top (and side) cover if the label rewinder  
is not needed.  
6. Verify that Print Mode is set for Transfer in the Printer Configuration  
Menu. The Print Mode submenu is located in the PRINTER CONTROL  
Main Configuration menu. See “Printer Control Menu” on page 91 for  
more information.  
7. The printer is now ready for Thermal Transfer Printing.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Label Rewinding  
The printer can be set up to automatically rewind labels into a roll by using the  
label rewinder.  
1. Remove the front door insert cover from the front door by sliding the insert  
cover up to unlock it, then pushing it out of the front of the door assembly.  
1
2
Legend:  
1) Front Door Insert Cover  
2) Label Taken Sensor Gate  
2. Remove the label rewinder bracket from inside the printer. Turn the  
thumb screw holding the bracket to the printer chassis counter-clockwise  
to loosen. The screw is used for mounting and storing the bracket.  
2
1
Legend:  
1) Label Rewinder Bracket  
2) Thumbscrew  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
2
Label Rewinding  
3. Hook the two stepped tabs of the label rewind bracket onto the two  
notches on the top edge of the platen roller assembly’s tear-bar plate.  
Swing the bracket down. Align the bracket’s tabs with the platen’s bracket  
reference holes and insert them.  
4. Secure the bracket with the thumb screw.  
5. Remove the label rewind clip from the label rewinder spindle.  
1
3
2
4
Legend:  
1) Label Rewind Bracket  
2) Platen Roller Tear Bar Plate  
3) Label Rewinder Spindle  
4) Label Rewind Clip  
6. With the label stock already loaded and the front door open (To load  
labels see “Loading Roll Media” on page 29), thread the label stock  
around and below the platen roller assembly.  
7. Press the FEED key with the printhead closed, as needed, to supply more  
label stock or liner.  
1
Legend:  
1) Label Stock/Liner  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. If a label is on the end of the label liner, remove it.  
a. Thread the liner around the label rewinder spindle counter-clockwise,  
as shown.  
b. Slide the label rewind clip over the label liner end and onto the label  
rewinder spindle.  
c. Fold the label liner over the clip to the back of the printer. This helps  
lock in the liner.  
d. Press the FEED key until the label liner is taut.  
1
2
Legend:  
1) Label Rewinder Spindle  
2) Label Rewind Clip  
9. To rewind labels, set Media Handling to Continuous in the configuration  
menu. The Media Handling submenu is located in the PRINTER  
CONTROL Main Configuration menu. See Chapter 3 for more information  
on configuring the printer.  
10. Close the printer’s front door and top (and side) cover.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Label Peel Off  
Label Peel Off  
The printer can be set to automatically peel off labels from the backing liner  
and dispense them one at a time while rewinding the liner. This configuration  
requires use of the printer’s label rewinder.  
1. Remove the front door insert cover from the front door of the printer. Slide  
the insert cover up to unlock it, then push it out of the front of the door  
assembly.  
2. For Peel-Off mode, flip the label taken sensor gate down.  
3. If the label rewinder bracket is mounted on the platen tear bar assembly  
at the front of the printer, remove it and secure it in the stored position as  
shown.  
1
3
2
Legend:  
1) Front Door Insert Cover  
2) Label Taken Sensor Gate  
3) Label Rewind Bracket  
4. With the label stock already loaded and the front door open (To load  
labels, see “Loading Roll Media” on page 29) thread the label liner around  
and below the platen roller assembly.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Press the FEED key with the printhead closed, as needed, to supply more  
label stock or liner.  
6. If a label is on the end of the label liner, remove it.  
7. Thread the liner around the label rewinder spindle counter-clockwise, as  
shown. Slide the label rewind clip over the label liner end and onto the  
label rewinder spindle.  
1
2
Legend:  
1) Label Rewinder Spindle  
2) Label Liner  
8. Fold the label liner over the clip to the back of the printer. This helps lock  
in the liner.  
1
Legend:  
1) Label Rewind Clip  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Label Peel Off  
9. Press the FEED key until the label liner is taut.  
10. For automatic label peel-off mode, set Media Handling to Peel-Off in the  
configuration menu. The Media Handling submenu is located in the  
PRINTER CONTROL Main Configuration menu. See Chapter 3 for more  
information on configuring the printer.  
Peel-Off Mode  
1
Close the printer’s front door and top (and side) cover.  
Legend:  
1) Peeled Label Area  
11. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer Online.  
12. Press the FEED key. A label should advance to the peel-off position  
under the label taken sensor gate and “LABEL PRESENT Remove Label”  
should be displayed.  
NOTE: While printing a print job, do not press the FEED key with the ‘LABEL  
PRESENT Remove Label’ message displayed or the message will be  
removed until the PAUSE key is pressed. Also, each pressing of the  
FEED key will cause a blank label to be added at the end of the print  
job.  
13. Remove the label. “ONLINE” should then be displayed.  
NOTE: A problem where labels drop back down onto the liner before they  
can be manually removed can occur, causing the label taken sensor  
to falsely sense the label was removed. Labels of 1.0 to 1.5 inches  
long are more likely to demonstrate this condition.  
This problem can be resolved by decreasing Print Speed or Setting  
Paper Feed Shift (under the PRINTER CONTROL menu) from 0.00  
inches to a negative (-) 0.07 to 0.10 inch value to retract the label  
back slightly keeping it in the horizontal position under the sensor.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Label Variations And The Label Sensor  
Your T4204 is equipped with a transmissive sensor that detects the gap  
between labels while they are being printed. The trailing edge of the gap  
establishes the Top-of-Form position. This feature depends on the ability of  
the sensor to “see through” the label liner, index hole or notch in the media. In  
order to support this type of media, select the Transmissive option under the  
PRINTER CONTROL Media Sensor menu. The Transmission Media Sensor  
Assembly must be partitioned correctly. (See Sensor Assembly Horizontal  
Adjustment, below.)  
A reflective sensor located on the lower portion of the same sensor assembly  
detects a black horizontal stripe on media with reflective label backing. The  
trailing edge of the black stripe establishes the Top-of-Form position. This  
feature depends on the ability of the sensor to detect the difference in the  
amount of light reflected off the back of the label material and the black stripe.  
Select the Reflective option under the PRINTER CONTROL Media Sensor  
menu in order to support this type of media. Additionally, the Reflector Sensor  
must be in the correct horizontal position.  
Sensor Assembly Horizontal Adjustment  
In order to accurately detect the gap, hole, notch, or narrow black stripe, the  
transmissive sensor assembly can be moved 1.4 inches along the width of the  
media by squeezing together the two blue locking tabs, located under the  
label guide, and sliding the sensor to the desired position. The actual location  
of the transmissive sensor is indicated by the sensor crystal visible at the front  
of the label guide when the printhead assembly is open.  
Position the transmissive sensor directly under the hole or notch. If it extends  
the full width of the media, position it in the middle of the transmission liner  
gap.  
The reflective sensor is located directly below R2, the resistor farthest to the  
right on the sensor PCBA. The resistor is visible when the printhead is open.  
The reflective sensor should be positioned as close as possible in the middle  
of the width of the label black stripe.  
When you use either Transmissive or Reflective Media sensing, adhere to the  
media specifications described in Appendix A and ensure that the Page  
Length value set in the PRINTER CONTROL Main Menu of the Configuration  
Menu (or Page Length value sent via software command) matches the  
physical length of the label or tag stock installed in the printer. In addition, do  
the sensor calibration procedure described below whenever a different type of  
media sensing will be required (Transmissive or Reflective), when installing  
untried media, or when the printer is losing Top-of-Form position. Loss of Top-  
of-Form is usually followed by an error message on the LCD, such as “GAP  
NOT DETECTED Check Media” or “LOAD PAPER”.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
2
Calibrating The Transmissive And Reflective Sensors  
Calibrating The Transmissive And Reflective Sensors  
Due to manufacturing differences in transmissive and reflective label stock,  
the sensors may have difficulty distinguishing between the label and the liner  
(gap) or the label and the black mark. When this occurs, the printer will  
display an error message on the LCD such as “GAP NOT DETECTED Check  
Media” or “LOAD PAPER”. The printer’s sensitivity for detecting the TOF  
(Top-Of-Form) position of the media installed can be optimized by using the  
Calibrate features in the PRINTER CONTROL menu.  
Sensor sensitivity can be improved by changing the Refl Value for reflective  
media or by changing the Trans Value for transmissive media. These values  
can be changed manually within the PRINTER CONTROL menu or can be  
determined automatically by using the Run Calibrate procedure. The change  
in values (derived automatically or manually) takes effect immediately within  
the current configuration menu, but is not automatically saved. If Run  
Calibrate is performed again the new values will overwrite the previous values  
for the current menu.  
The new values can be saved into non-volatile memory (menus 1-8 only) by  
using the Save Configuration procedure. If the current menu in use is the  
Factory menu, the values will take effect but cannot be saved into memory  
and will be lost when the printer is powered off.  
Use the Run Calibrate procedure to automatically determine the Trans or Refl  
Values before attempting to change the values manually. When Run Calibrate  
has completed successfully, the Sensed Distance option in the Calibrate  
menu will display a distance in inches based on the media type in use:  
transmissive media = the label length plus one gap length  
reflective media = the distance from the trailing edge of one black  
stripe to the trailing edge of the next black stripe.  
The Sensed Distance value cannot be manually changed and is updated only  
as a result of the Run Calibrate procedure. The factory default value of  
Sensed Distance is 0.00 inches.  
If Run Calibrate fails to determine the proper values and ends with a fault  
message displayed (GAP NOT DETECTED or LOAD PAPER), you can try it  
again by going back to Run Calibrate under the PRINTER CONTROL main  
menu and then press the ENTER key. Or, you can manually change the  
Trans Value or the Refl Value. Trans Value and Refl Value have a range of 0  
- 20 (factory default = 10).  
Once the correct values are determined and the Page Length setting in the  
PRINTER CONTROL menu is equal to (or slightly less) than the physical  
page length, depress the FEED key to advance media and determine if it  
consistently stops at the correct TOF position each time.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Run Calibrate Procedure  
NOTE: Verify that the media installed in the printer matches the PRINTER  
CONTROL menu Media Sensor option (Transmissive or Reflective).  
Verify that the transmissive sensor is horizontally positioned to permit  
sensing of the notch, gap, or black stripe. (See “Sensor Assembly  
1. Press and release the PAUSE key to place the printer offline.  
2. Open the printer front door to allow access to the Secondary Control  
Panel.  
3. Press and release the UP and DOWN (5and 6) keys simultaneously to  
unlock the printer menu. “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” appears on the  
LCD.  
4. Press the NEXT (4) key until “PRINTER CONTROL” appears on the  
LCD.  
5. Press the DOWN (6) key. “Page Width” appears on the LCD.  
6. Press the NEXT (4) key until “Calibrate” appears.  
7. Press the DOWN (6) key. “Run Calibrate” appears.  
8. Press the ENTER key. The media will advance a minimum of 11 inches  
plus the distance required to detect three additional Top-of-Form  
positions.  
The procedure is completed successfully if no fault is displayed and the  
Sensed Distance value is correct. See “Sensed Distance” on page 95 for  
a detailed description of Sensed Distance.  
NOTE: If a fault message such as “GAP NOT DETECTED” or “LOAD  
PAPER” appears while performing the Run Calibrate procedure,  
press the CLEAR key and perform the Run Calibrate procedure  
again, by going back to Run Calibrate under the PRINTER  
CONTROL main menu and then press the ENTER key.  
9. Press the UP (5) key until “OFFLINE PRINTER CONTROL” appears on  
the LCD.  
10. Press the FEED key. The media should advance one forms length.  
NOTE: If the Page Length value is longer than the physical page length of the  
media in use, the printer will continue to advance media to achieve  
that Page Length value and then stop at the next TOF position.  
11. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer Online.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
2
Cleaning The Printhead  
NOTE: The amount of media advancement is also based on which Media  
Handling selection is enabled under the PRINTER CONTROL Main  
menu of the Configuration Menu. ‘Tear-Off’ and ‘Tear-Off Strip’ (after  
Tear-Strip Time) will advance the media until the Top-of-Form of the  
next form is positioned over the Tear bar. When ‘Continuous’ Media  
Handling is selected the media will advance only until the Top-of-  
Form of the next form is positioned under the printhead.  
12. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer Online.  
Cleaning The Printhead  
One cause of poor print quality is a dirty printhead. You should clean the  
printhead whenever you replace the ribbon (thermal transfer mode) or install  
new media (direct thermal mode).Clean the printhead with the printhead  
Cleaning Pen supplied with the printer, or with Isopropyl alcohol and a cotton  
swab.  
1. Open the printhead assembly.  
2. Pull back any rolled or fanfold media located directly under the printhead.  
1
Legend:  
1) Printhead Assembly  
3. Gently rub the felt tip of the Cleaning Pen or a cotton swab with Isopropyl  
alcohol across the amber area of the printhead.  
4. Allow the printhead to dry for one minute before reloading the labels.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Configuring The Printer  
Overview  
Changing printer settings, such as print speed or emulation, is referred to as  
configuration. The configuration process is done using the secondary control  
panel and includes the following:  
Configuring the printer for different host interface options  
Customizing label formats  
Checking printer status  
Running various maintenance tests  
NOTE: Control codes sent by the host system will override the control panel  
settings.  
Menu Navigation  
The secondary control panel consists of four function keys and four arrow  
keys. Figure 1 shows the keypad section of the panel. An explanation of each  
key is in Table 1.  
This section explains how to use the secondary control panel to change  
individual settings and save them as a customized configuration.  
Legend:  
1) UP Key  
2) PREV Key  
3) DOWN Key  
4) CLEAR Key  
5) PRT CONFIG Key  
6) NEXT Key  
4
7) JOB SELECT Key  
5
8) ENTER Key  
1
6
2
7
3
8
Figure 1. Secondary Control Panel  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
Table 1: Key Function Summary - Secondary Control Panel  
Function  
Key  
CLEAR  
If a fault condition exists, pressing this key clears the fault message  
and returns the printer to offline mode.  
NOTE: If the fault condition is not corrected before pressing CLEAR,  
the message reappears when attempting to place the printer  
online.  
PRT CONFIG  
Prints the current printer configuration menu settings (offline mode  
only).  
JOB SELECT  
ENTER  
Selects a specific printer configuration menu (offline mode only).  
Selects the current value within the printer configuration menu (offline  
mode only) and displays an asterisk (*) next to the value. If the ENTER  
key is locked, the value will not be selected and an “ENTER SWITCH  
LOCKED” message displays for one second, followed by a display of  
the previously selected value. Pressing the UP and DOWN keys at the  
same time unlocks the ENTER key and permits value selection.  
This key causes the printer to go up one level in the menu structure  
(offline mode only).  
UP (5)  
This key causes the printer to go down one level in the menu structure  
(offline mode only).  
DOWN (6)  
PREV (3)  
If the menu selection is a value, pressing this key causes the value to  
be decremented. If the menu selection is an option, pressing this key  
allows selection among options on the current menu level. Holding the  
key down causes the key to repeat at about seven times a second  
(offline mode only).  
If the menu selection is a value, pressing this key causes the value to  
be incremented. If the menu selection is an option, pressing this key  
allows selection among options on the current menu level. Holding the  
key down causes the key to repeat at about seven times a second  
(offline mode only).  
NEXT (4)  
UP+DOWN  
(5+6)  
Simultaneously pressing these keys unlocks or locks the printer menu  
(offline mode only). This is the default key combination for locking/  
unlocking the secondary control panel. You can change the key  
combination. See page 72.  
NEXT+PREV  
(4+3)  
Simultaneously pressing these keys enables a printer soft reset (offline  
mode only).  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using The Secondary Control Panel  
Using The Secondary Control Panel  
Configuration parameters are set from the secondary control panel or are  
retrieved from the printer’s memory. The parameters define how the printer  
will respond to command and interface signals from the host computer.  
The configuration menu structure consists of the main configuration menus  
and the corresponding submenus, where applicable.  
NOTE: Many of the selectable configurations refer to printer options or  
features that may or may not be present in your printer. Selecting an  
option or feature that is not present will result in no action being  
performed by the printer, or an ‘OPTION NOT INSTALLED’ message  
displayed.  
Moving Within The Configuration Menu  
To configure the printer, it must be offline. If the ONLINE indicator is lit, press  
and release the PAUSE key to place the printer offline. When the printer is  
offline, OFFLINE appears on the top line of the LCD and CONFIG. CONTROL  
appears on the next line.  
Figure 2 shows the configuration main menu options. For details on the  
parameters that pertain to those options, refer to the specified pages.  
Movement within the configuration menus is controlled by using the  
appropriate arrow keys. (See Table 1, for more details on the function of the  
operator panel keys.)  
Figure 3 shows how to change a configuration menu option and the  
messages that appear in the display after you press each key.  
If you follow the example shown in Figure 3, you will configure the printer for  
Direct Thermal Print Mode.  
In this manual the factory default settings for all available options are  
indicated by an asterisk (*) located to the right of the option.  
You can select different options and save them as the power on default;  
however, they can only be saved to configurations menus 1-8. Changes made  
to the factory configuration menu cannot be saved.  
When the printer is online, the first line of the LCD indicates ONLINE and the  
second line lists the active interface port and type of emulation.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
OFFLINE  
CONFIG.  
CONTROL  
MAINT/MISC  
ACTIVE IGP  
EMUL  
EMULATION  
HOST  
INTERFACE  
1
Load Config.  
Save Config.  
Print Config.  
Delete Config.  
Power-Up Config.  
Protect Configs  
Name Configs.  
Reset Cfg Names  
IGP/PGL  
IGP/VGL  
LinePrinter+  
IGP/PGL  
Alarm  
Twinax  
Coax  
1
Power-Up State  
Hex Dump Mode  
Ptx Setup Option  
Display Language  
IGP/VGL  
Auto Switching  
Centronics*  
Serial  
1
CTHI  
Downloaded Fonts IEEE 1284  
1
File System  
Cancel Key  
Ethernet  
Auto Locking  
Set Lock Key  
Auto Label Map  
Compatibility  
Power Saver Time  
PRINTER  
CONTROL  
DIAGNOSTICS  
FONT  
MEMORY  
ETHERNET  
PARAMS  
1
Printer Tests  
System Memory  
Print Statistics  
Page Width  
Page Length  
Print Speed  
Print Intensity  
Print Mode  
Media Sensor  
Media Handling  
Paper Feed Shift  
Hor Image Shift  
Ver Image Shift  
Calibrate  
IP Address  
Gateway Address  
Subnet Mask  
Max Char Memory  
Max Cache Memory  
Max Cache Size  
Max Cached Char  
Max Fonts Loaded  
Font Weight  
MAC Address  
Novell Protocol  
NetBIOS Protocol  
Novell Frame  
PPM Port Number  
PPM Port Timeout  
Installed Fonts  
Tear-Strip Time  
Clip Page  
Error Recover  
1 if installed  
Figure 2. Configuration Main Menu  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting A Menu Option  
Step  
Press  
LCD  
Notes  
1.  
OFFLINE  
PAUSE  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
2.  
3.  
ENTER SWITCH  
UNLOCKED  
Allows you to make  
configuration changes.  
+
OFFLINE  
PRINTER CONTROL  
OR  
4.  
5.  
PRINTER CONTROL  
Page Width  
PRINTER CONTROL  
Print Mode  
UNTIL  
6.  
7.  
Print Mode  
Transfer*  
Print Mode  
Direct  
Cycle through the  
choices.  
OR  
8.  
Print Mode  
Direct*  
ENTER  
Figure 3. Moving within the Configuration Menu  
Selecting A Menu Option  
By default, the ENTER key is “locked” when the printer is turned on. This  
prevents accidental changes to the configuration menu. If you press the  
ENTER key when the key is locked, the message “ENTER SWITCH  
LOCKED” is displayed on the LCD for one second, and the value will not be  
selected.  
To unlock the ENTER key, press the UP and DOWN arrow keys  
simultaneously. This toggles the enter lock function.  
If this function is performed while the ENTER key is locked, the message  
“ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” will be displayed for one second, and the  
ENTER key will be unlocked.  
If this function is performed while the ENTER key is unlocked, the message  
“ENTER SWITCH LOCKED” will be displayed for one second, and the  
ENTER key will be locked.  
When the ENTER key is pressed (with the ENTER key unlocked), the value  
displayed is entered and the configuration is changed immediately.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
NOTE: The lock and unlock function can be configured to be other than the  
UP and DOWN keys. (See “Set Lock Key” on page 72.)  
IMPORTANT  
This change takes effect for all subsequent data and operations for the  
printer only after the printer is placed in the Online mode. The  
configuration change(s) stay in effect only while the printer is powered  
on. When the power is turned off, all current configuration data are lost  
unless you save the configuration.  
To save configuration information permanently or to select it as the power-up  
default, see page 57.  
Changing Printer Settings  
1. Make sure the printer is offline. If the ONLINE indicator is lit, press the  
PAUSE key. The following message will display:  
OFFLINE  
CONFIG CONTROL  
2. Press 3or 4key for the following display.  
OFFLINE  
PRINTER CONTROL  
3. Press the 6key for the following display:  
PRINTER CONTROL  
Page Width  
4. Press 3or 4to cycle through these options:  
Page Width  
Page Length  
Print Speed  
Print Intensity  
Print Mode  
Media Sensor  
Media Handling  
Paper Feed Shift  
Hor Image Shift  
Ver Image Shift  
Calibrate  
Tear-Strip Time  
Clip Page  
Error Recover  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving A Configuration  
5. When the desired menu displays, press the6key to access the available  
options or submenus.  
6. Press the3or 4key and hold to scroll through the values.  
7. Press the ENTER key to select a value. An asterisk (*) displays next to  
the selected value.  
8. If there are more values you want to change, use the 3456(LEFT,  
RIGHT, UP, or DOWN) keys to access the value and the ENTER key to  
select it. At any time, you may press the 5 key to return to the options  
one level higher.  
9. At any time, you may press the PAUSE key to exit the configuration menu  
and place the printer online. Once you have finished selecting all your  
options, save your configuration.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
The printer must be placed in the Online mode before the new menu  
selections or changes take effect.  
If you do not save your configuration, all your new values will be lost  
when you turn off the printer.  
Saving A Configuration  
You can save up to eight different configurations to meet eight unique print job  
requirements. For example:  
Factory:  
Factory Default (This cannot be altered.)  
Config. 1: Selects RS-232 Serial Interface  
Selects Page Width of 4 inches  
Selects Page Length of 24 inches  
Selects image Horizontal Shift of 0.20 inches, etc.  
Config. 2: Selects Parallel Interface  
Selects Page Width of 2.2 inches  
Selects Page Length of 25.0 mm  
Selects image Vertical Shift of 0.10 inches, etc.  
The configurations are saved and stored in non-volatile memory for later use.  
These configurations, including the factory default configuration, will not be  
erased from memory when the printer power is turned off.  
If you do not save your configuration (to the non-volatile memory) before you  
turn off the printer, any changes made to that current configuration will be lost.  
NOTE: If the Protect Configs. option is enabled, the new configuration will not  
be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
Follow these steps to save a new configuration:  
1. Press the PAUSE key to take the printer offline. The following message  
displays:  
OFFLINE  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
2. Press the6key until:  
CONFIG CONTROL  
Load Config.  
3. Press the 3or 4key until the following displays:  
CONFIG CONTROL  
Save Config.  
4. Press the 6key until:  
Save Config.  
1*  
5. Press the 3or 4key to cycle through the options (1-8). Note that the  
factory default configuration is not listed.  
6. When the desired number displays, press ENTER to select it. The  
following message displays briefly:  
Saving  
Configuration  
When processing is completed, the display shows:  
Save Config.  
X*  
NOTE: If the configuration number has been previously saved and the  
Protect Configs. option is enabled under CONFIG CONTROL, the  
following error message displays:  
CONFIG. EXISTS  
Delete First  
If the above occurs, see page 59, step 4.  
It is recommended that you print your configuration and store it in a safe place  
for future reference. Refer to page 60.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying A Saved Configuration  
Modifying A Saved Configuration  
You can change a saved configuration by rewriting over it. For example, you  
can modify Config. 1, shown below. Suppose you want to keep all the settings  
but you want to select the parallel interface instead of the serial interface.  
Config. 1: Selects RS-232 Serial Interface  
Selects Page Width of 4 inches  
Selects Page Length of 24 inches  
Selects Image Horizontal Shift of 0.20 inches, etc.  
1. Load the configuration to be changed (for example, Config. 1).  
a. Press the PAUSE key to take the printer offline.  
OFFLINE  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
b. Press the6key.  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
Load Config.  
c. Press the6key.  
Load Config.  
1*  
d. Press the3or 4key to cycle through the options: Factory 1-8.  
e. When the desired number displays, press the ENTER key to select it.  
The following message is displayed while loading.  
Loading Saved  
Configuration  
Then, the following message displays when it is loaded:  
Load Config.  
X*  
2. Move through the menu and change all the desired values. (In this  
example, under Host Interface, you would change the value from Serial to  
Centronics.)  
3. Press the ENTER key to save each new value. An asterisk (*) displays.  
4. Before saving the modified configuration, you must delete the original  
configuration if the Protect Configs. option is enabled.  
a. Press the 5key.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
b. Press the 3or 4key until the following displays:  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
Delete Config.  
c. Press the 6 key.  
d. Press the 3or 4key to cycle through the options (1-8). When the  
desired number displays, press the ENTER key to select it. The  
following message is displayed.  
Deleting  
Configuration  
Then, the following displays when it is deleted:  
Delete Config.  
X*  
5. Save the new configuration as described in the page 57. Make sure you  
select the same number (e.g., Config. 1) when saving the modified  
configuration. The new configuration writes over the existing one.  
6. Print a copy of this newest configuration (see below) and store it in a safe  
place.  
Printing A Configuration  
Print and store your configurations for future reference. The printout provides  
a list of the parameters that were set when you configured the printer. A  
sample configuration printout is shown in Figure 4.  
To print a configuration:  
1. Press the PAUSE key to take the printer offline.  
OFFLINE  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
2. Press the 6key for the following display:  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
Load Config.  
3. Press the 3or 4key until the following displays:  
CONFIG. CONTROL  
Print Config.  
4. Press the 6key.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing A Configuration  
5. Press the3or 4key to cycle through the following printout options:  
Current*  
Factory  
Power-Up  
All  
1-8 customized configurations  
6. When the desired option displays, press the ENTER key. The printer  
prints the specified configuration. Refer to Figure 4, for a sample  
configuration printout.  
NOTE: If the configuration you want to print has not been saved, the  
following message will display momentarily:  
CONFIG. DOES NOT  
EXIST/Save First  
This message indicates that no configuration menu has been saved  
under the configuration value you have selected and therefore cannot  
be printed. You must either select another configuration to print or  
load and then save a configuration to that configuration value first.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
Figure 4. Sample Configuration Printout (sheet 1 of 3)  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing A Configuration  
Figure 4. Sample Configuration Printout (sheet 2 of 3)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Menu Navigation  
Figure 4. Sample Configuration Printout (sheet 3 of 3)  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu  
Menu Options  
The rest of this chapter shows each menu along with its possible choices, and  
explains what each of the choices mean.  
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu  
The CONFIG. CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer’s  
configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs.  
* = Factory Default  
CONFIG.  
CONTROL  
(from page 54)  
Load Config.  
Save Config.  
Print Config.  
Delete Config.  
Power-up  
Config.  
Protect  
Configs.  
Factory*  
1-8  
1*  
(1-8)  
Current*  
Factory  
Power-up  
All  
1*  
(1-8)  
Factory*  
1-8  
Disable*  
Enable  
1-8  
Name  
Configs  
Reset Cfg  
Names  
1*  
(1-8)  
1* (1-8)  
All  
Load Config.  
The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory. This parameter  
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.  
Save Config.  
This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet  
different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the  
parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in  
memory, and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs.  
parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the  
existing configuration has been deleted first. The factory default configuration  
cannot be changed. See page 57 for details.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Print Config.  
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations. It  
is recommended you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for  
quick referral.  
Delete Config.  
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory  
default configuration cannot be deleted.  
Power-Up Config.  
You can specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the  
power-up configuration.  
Protect Configs.  
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an  
existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When  
disabled (default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing  
configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the  
existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”  
displays.  
Name Configs  
You may specify a 15 character name which can be used to refer to a  
configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load  
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.  
menus. The names can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.  
When you move into the Name Configs menu, the top line of the display  
shows the current configuration name. The second line of the display is  
initially the same as the top line. You can modify the second line of the display  
without affecting the top line until the ENTER key is pressed, which sets the  
modified name as the current selection.  
Press the UP or DOWN (5or 6) keys to cycle through the values available  
for that character at the cursor location. Press the NEXT (4) key to move to  
the next character to be modified. Press the PREV (3) key to go back to a  
character you have already modified. Continue until you have entered the  
name you want to give to this configuration, then press ENTER to save. The  
name you entered will now represent this configuration on the printer's front  
panel. To exit this menu without saving, press any key other than the ENTER  
key. The configuration name will revert to the last saved value.  
Reset Cfg Names  
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the  
configuration number.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Active IGP EMUL Menu  
Active IGP EMUL Menu  
* = Factory Default  
ACTIVE IGP  
EMUL  
IGP/PGL*  
IGP/VGL  
This ACTIVE IGP EMUL function allows the user to activate an installed IGP  
VGL or PGL emulation. There are two methods for selecting the desired  
emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer  
menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the  
emulation automatically (see the appropriate Programmer’s Reference  
Manual for details).  
When changing from one IGP emulation to the other, the printer will load the  
Power-up configuration. Thus, any setting performed before selecting those  
emulations and not saved in NVRAM will be lost.  
IMPORTANT  
When the ACTIVE IGP EMUL is switched from one IGP emulation to  
another, the printer will load the settings saved under the Power-Up  
Config. menu. These settings may not be the current settings in use  
prior to switching the Active IGP emulation. The Print Mode, Media  
Sensor, Media Handling, Calibration (Trans or Refl Values), Page Length  
and Width and numerous other settings in use will change to the  
settings saved under the Power-Up Config. menu. Users should  
therefore insure that all desired settings are saved as the printer Power-  
Up Config. menu settings prior to switching the Active IGP emulation.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Emulation Menu  
The LinePrinter+ emulation is the standard emulation on the printer, along  
with a choice of IGP/PGL, or IGP/VGL. The CTHI emulation is available when  
the Coax/Twinax option is installed.  
The contents of the emulation menu structure will be created by the printer at  
run-time, and, when powered up, the printer will automatically load the default  
configuration values. The default set of parameters is the factory setting until  
a new setting is saved to non-volatile memory.  
NOTE: Each emulation may have a unique set of configuration options in  
addition to those that are in the printer system list. See the  
appropriate section at the end of this chapter for those settings.  
EMULATION  
LinePrinter+  
IGP/PGL  
IGP/VGL  
CTHI  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAINT / MISC Menu  
MAINT / MISC Menu  
* = Factory Default  
1
If you have the CT option,  
MAINT/MISC  
Enable is the default value,  
otherwise it is Disable.  
If installed  
2
Display  
Language  
Alarm  
Power-up  
State  
Hex Dump  
Mode  
Ptx SETUP  
Option  
On*  
Cont. Beep  
Off  
Online*  
Offline  
Disable*  
Enable  
Setup Parse  
Enable*  
Disable  
Setup SFCC  
21h*  
English*  
German  
French  
Italian  
Spanish  
(1h-FFh)  
File System  
File System  
Overwrite Files  
Enable*  
Disable  
View File List  
File 1  
Char.  
Operations  
Ld Char at  
PwrUp  
Set  
Operations  
Ld Set at  
PwrUp  
File 2  
etc.  
Delete Files  
File 1  
File 2  
Delete frm Flash  
Load from Flash  
Save to Flash  
Disable*  
Enable  
Delete frm Flash  
Load from Flash  
Save to Flash  
Disable*  
Enable  
Delete from RAM  
Delete from RAM  
etc.  
Optimize&Reboot  
Print File List  
1
Set Lock Key  
Compatibility  
Power Saver  
Time  
Cancel Key  
Auto Locking  
Auto Label  
Map  
Default*  
Laser  
Disable  
1 minute  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Auto Map Select  
Disable*  
P5000  
T3000  
T1006  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes*  
30 minutes  
45 minutes  
60 minutes  
Enable  
Auto Label Width  
02.0 inches*  
(00.1-04.1 inches)  
Num Auto Labels  
2 labels*  
(1-40 labels)  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Alarm  
On. An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault occurs, such as a  
paper jam.  
Continuous. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,  
which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.  
Off. No audible alarm will sound.  
Power-Up State  
Online. The printer powers up in the online state.  
Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state.  
Hex Dump Mode  
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal  
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the  
host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.  
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception  
problems. Hex Dump Mode is supported with a minimum media width of 4.10  
inches.  
NOTE: Narrower media will result in characters missing or truncated in the  
printout.  
PTX SETUP Option  
Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX SETUP command and  
functions.  
Setup Parse. Disables or enables the PTX SETUP command.  
Setup SFCC. Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character  
you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command. Valid hex  
values are 01-FF. The default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the  
“!” character.  
Display Language  
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,  
Spanish, French, Italian, or German.  
Reset Cmd CFG Ld  
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command (ESC @ or  
ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will  
be loaded.  
Disable. The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset  
command is executed.  
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset  
command is executed.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINT / MISC Menu  
Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the  
reset command is executed.  
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the  
reset command is executed.  
Downloaded Fonts  
Char Operations. Allows you to delete a character from flash, load a  
character from flash, save a character to flash, and delete a character  
from RAM.  
Ld Char at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at  
power up.  
Set Operations. Allows you to delete a character set from flash, load a  
character from flash, save a character set to flash, and delete a character  
set from RAM.  
Ld Set at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at  
power up.  
File System  
Overwrite Files. Allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by  
disabling the overwrite function.  
View File List. Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the  
DOWN key displays the file size.  
Delete Files. Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the  
ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the front panel.  
Optimize & Reboot. Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files. After  
pressing ENTER, wait for the printer to reboot.  
Print File List. Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and  
several statistics on File System usage.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either  
back online or offline.  
Cancel Key  
When enabled, the CANCEL key may be used to clear all data in the print  
buffer without printing any of the data.  
Auto Locking  
Disable. The ENTER key must be locked manually.  
Enable. The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after  
the last front panel key press.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Set Lock Key  
Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the UP and DOWN keys are  
pressed at the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose  
different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any  
group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ENTER  
key or any key combinations which are already used for another function.  
There is no limit to how many keys can be selected.  
To set the new lock key:  
1. Go to the configuration menu and select “Set Lock Key” (follow the menu  
structure on page 69).  
2. Press ENTER. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”  
3. Press the combination of keys that you want to be the new lock key. Make  
sure you press all keys selected at the same time.  
4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key  
again.” Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the  
selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key selection.” Return to  
step 2 and start over.  
5. If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly, the display will  
read, “Lock key has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the  
display will read “Verification failed.” Start over at step 1.  
6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the PAUSE  
key to put the printer back online.  
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered  
off and back on.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINT / MISC Menu  
Auto Label Map  
This option specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application.  
The IGP/Auto Label Mapping® feature allows backward compatibility of  
programs written for Printronix Wide Web line-matrix printers using Printronix  
IGP graphics languages. It allows the printer to print two-up (or other multi-up)  
labels. Instead of printing multiple labels across the printer, it prints the  
leftmost label and the rightmost label, so the printout will be twice as long but  
half as wide.  
Auto Map Select  
Disable. When a program is sent with horizontally adjacent labels that  
exceed the physical page width of the printer, the excess data will be  
clipped or wrapped based on the Autowrap menu option setting.  
Enable. The printer will automatically reposition the horizontally adjacent  
labels to a vertical adjacent position or combination of horizontal and  
vertical position based on the values selected under the Auto Label Width  
and Num Auto Labels options (described below).  
Auto Label Width. The width of a single label to be printed or the  
maximum width of the media that will be used for the print file. The value  
is selectable in 00.1 inch increments with a range of 00.1 inch through  
04.1 inches. (See Note below).  
NOTE: The maximum Auto Label Width value will be limited to the current  
PRINTER CONTROL/Page Width value selected in the configuration  
menu.  
Num Auto Labels. The desired number of labels to be printed vertically  
adjacent on the form. The value is selectable with a range of 1 through 40  
labels.  
NOTE: Thr maximum number of labels is determined by the amount of  
memory in the printer and the width of the label. The maximum length  
is 47 inches using the maximum 4.09 inch print width. Reducing the  
print width extends the maximum print length.  
Examples  
All of the examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the  
label length.  
Example 1: Simple Case  
Problem: A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4 inch  
labels for a printer with a physical width of 8 inches. The user now desires to  
use this file with a printer that has a 4 inch physical width.  
Solution: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4 inches (the width of the label),  
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping  
feature.  
Printer Operation: The printer will print the first (leftmost) 4 inch label first.  
Once the first label has been completed, the printer will print the second 4  
inch label. These labels will appear vertically adjacent on the form.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Thermal Printer Output  
Label 1  
Line-Matrix Printer Output  
Label 1  
Label 2  
Label 2  
Narrow  
Web  
Wide Web Width  
Width  
Example 2: Uneven Number Case  
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2 inch  
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4 inch  
physical width.  
Solution #1: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4 inches (the width of two  
labels), configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label  
Mapping feature.  
Printer Operation for Solution #1: The printer will print the first two labels at  
the same time. These first two labels will be horizontally adjacent. Once these  
labels have been completed, the printer will print the remaining 2 inch label  
along with a blank 2 inch label.  
File Contents:  
Print Output:  
Label  
1
Label  
2
Label  
1
Label  
2
Label  
3
Blank  
Label  
Label  
3
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINT / MISC Menu  
Solution #2: The user sets Auto Label Width to 2 inches, configures the Num  
Auto Labels to 3, and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature.  
Printer Operation for Solution #2: The printer will print the first 2 inch label  
by itself, the second 2 inch label by itself, and finally, the last 2 inch label by  
itself.  
Label  
1
Label  
1
Label  
2
Label  
3
Label  
2
Label  
3
Example 3: Blank Label Case  
Problem: A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4 inch labels. The user  
now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4 inch physical width. The  
user decides to set the Num Labels to 3 and the Label Width to 4 inches  
despite the fact that these values are not optimum.  
Printer Operation: The maximum Num Auto Labels = (47 inches/4 inches) =  
11. The selected value of 3 is legal. After the file is sent, the printer will begin  
by printing the first 4 inch width label. Once that label is complete, it will print  
the second 4 inch width label. Finally, once both of those labels have been  
printed, the printer will print a blank 4 inch label.  
Print Output:  
File Contents:  
Label  
1
Label  
1
Label  
2
Label  
2
Blank  
Label  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Compatibility  
This parameter allows you to make the T4204 thermal printer compatible with  
other printers.  
When trying to preserve compatibility with respect to barcodes, you may not  
always be able to make them equal in size. This is due to the various Dot-Per-  
Inch differences between printer types. In the case where an exact match  
cannot be made, the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will  
not be compromised and the barcode will be readable.  
Default. The default. Use for optimum performance.  
Laser. Forces the output to correspond with the laser line of printers.  
P5000. Forces the output to correspond with the P5000 line of line matrix  
printers.  
T3000. Forces the output to correspond with the T3000 line of thermal  
printers.  
T1006. Forces the output to correspond with the T1006 line of thermal  
printers.  
Power Saver Time  
The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time  
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode.  
Idle time begins counting down once media motion ends.  
Disable. When Disable is chosen, the printer will not enter the Power  
Saver mode.  
1 - 45 minutes. You may set the Power Saver Time from as little as 1  
minute to as long as 45 minutes.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
* = Factory Default  
1
Available when an Ethernet  
HOST  
INTERFACE  
Adapter is present.  
(from page 54)  
Twinax  
Coax  
Auto Switching  
Centronics*  
Serial  
(Available with  
CT Option)  
(Available with  
CT Option)  
1
Parallel  
Hotport  
Serial Hotport  
C/T Hotport  
Port Type  
Centronics*  
Dataproducts  
IEEE 1284  
Ethernet  
Disable  
Trickle Time  
1/4 sec.*  
1/2 sec.  
1 sec.  
Port Type  
RS-232*  
RS-422  
Disable  
Trickle Time  
1/4 sec.*  
1/2 sec.  
1 sec.  
Port Type  
Twinax*  
Coax  
Disable  
Timeout  
10 sec.*  
(1-60)  
Report Status  
Disable*  
Enable  
2 sec.  
4 sec.  
2 sec.  
8 sec.  
4 sec.  
8 sec.  
16 sec.  
Off  
16 sec.  
Off  
Timeout  
10 sec.*  
(1-60)  
Report Status  
Disable*  
Enable  
Timeout  
10 sec.*  
(1-60)  
Report Status  
Disable*  
Enable  
1
IEEE 1284  
Ethernet  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many  
types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The currently  
selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message  
display. Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface  
parameters which can be configured.  
IMPORTANT  
When switching between Twinax, Coax, or Auto Switching, the printer  
will load the power-up configuration. Any settings made and not saved  
before selecting these interfaces are lost.  
Auto Switching  
Gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially. With  
Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to the serial, parallel,  
coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface connected.  
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial  
port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer’s Auto  
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received, without  
the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.  
Port Type  
Select the types of parallel, serial and/or C/T interfaces which are connected  
to the printer. For example, if your printer is attached to one host with a  
Centronics connection and a second host with an RS-422 serial connection,  
you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu, RS-422 under  
the Serial Hotport menu, and Disable under the C/T Hotport menu.  
Trickle Time  
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by  
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from  
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this  
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for  
future use.  
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then  
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel  
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from  
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.  
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next  
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the  
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its  
buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
Timeout  
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and  
check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the printer has not  
received data from the host after certain period of time, it needs to Timeout in  
order to service the other ports.  
Report Status  
Disable. When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port reports  
the fault to the host.  
Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active  
port.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Centronics (Parallel)  
* = Factory Default  
CENTRONICS  
(from page 54)  
Data Bit 8  
PI Ignored  
Data Polarity  
Resp.  
Polarity  
Busy On  
Strobe  
Latch  
Data On  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Standard*  
Inverted  
Standard*  
Inverted  
Enable*  
Disable  
Leading*  
Trailing  
Prime  
Signal  
TOF Action  
Buffer Size  
In K  
Enable*  
Disable  
Reset*  
Do Nothing  
8*  
1-16  
Data Bit 8  
Enable. Allows access to the extended ASCII character set.  
Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a  
zero, regardless of its actual setting.  
PI Ignored  
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.  
Enable. Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control  
codes.  
Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU  
commands when the PI signal is true.  
Data Polarity  
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your  
host computer.  
Standard. Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.  
Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host  
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
Response Polarity  
The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity  
of your host computer.  
Standard. Does not invert the response signal.  
Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.  
Busy On Strobe  
Enable. Asserts a busy signal after each character is received.  
Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.  
Latch Data On  
Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data  
strobe signal.  
Prime Signal  
Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host  
asserts the Prime Signal.  
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host  
asserts the Prime Signal.  
TOF Action  
Reset. A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime  
signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the Prime  
Signal parameter is enabled.  
Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is  
asserted from the host.  
Buffer Size In K  
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port  
buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Serial  
* = Factory Default  
SERIAL  
(from page 54)  
Interface  
Type  
Parity  
Stop Bits  
Data Protocol  
Baud Rate  
Word Length  
RS-232*  
RS-422  
XON/XOFF*  
ETX/ACK  
600  
1200  
8 bits*  
7 bits  
1 stop bit*  
2 stop bits  
None*  
Odd  
ACK/NAK  
Series 1 Char  
Series 2 Char  
DTR  
2400  
4800  
9600*  
38400  
57600  
115200  
Even  
Mark  
Sense  
Poll  
Character  
Poll  
Response  
Data Terminal  
Ready  
Request  
To Send  
Buffer Size  
In K  
00 Hex*  
(00-FF hex)  
0 ms*  
(0-30)  
True*  
On-Line and BNF*  
Off-Line or BF  
On-Line  
1*  
(1-16)  
On-Line and BNF  
Off-Line or BF  
On-Line  
False  
False  
True  
One Char  
Enquiry  
Idle  
Response  
Printer Status  
Disable*  
ENQ/STX  
ENQ  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Interface Type  
This parameter allows you to select either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial port  
interface.  
Data Protocol  
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host  
interface requirements.  
XON / XOFF. The printer controls the flow of communication from the  
host by turning the transmission on and off. In some situations, such as  
when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast, the  
printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF  
character. An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in  
the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware  
will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received. When  
cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON). The data does not  
have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block protocol.  
ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of  
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the  
block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX  
signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has  
received the entire block of data.  
ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has  
accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device  
did not receive the transmission.  
SERIES1 1 CHAR. The printer controls the flow of communication from  
the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters  
sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75  
percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response  
character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer  
full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host.  
Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate  
response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the  
printer will send a response character every two seconds while the  
number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer  
size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character  
xx Hex option on the front panel from 00 through FF hex), the printer will  
send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll  
Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n  
milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed  
from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause  
problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g. control codes, bit  
image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character  
and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no  
effect, and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from  
buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new  
printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.  
The response characters are described in Table 2.  
Table 2. Series1 1 Char Response Characters  
Printer State  
Response  
Online and Buffer Empty  
Online and Buffer Full  
Offline and Buffer Empty  
Offline and Buffer Full  
CR  
3
0
2
SERIES1 2 CHAR. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the  
Series1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The  
response characters are described in Table 3.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Table 3. Series1 2 Char Response Characters  
Printer State  
Response  
1 CR  
Online and Buffer Empty  
Online and Buffer Full  
Offline and Buffer Empty  
Offline and Buffer Full  
3 CR  
0 CR  
2 CR  
DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to  
the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send  
a high signal; if the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal. DTR tells  
the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during an  
unsafe condition, data will be lost.) DTR is not available when RS-422 is  
selected.  
Baud Rate  
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed  
at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.  
The choices for the RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces are 600, 1200, 2400,  
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud.  
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to  
use RS-422 to prevent data loss. You also may need to increase the  
Buffer Size in K parameter from the default (1 Kbyte) to improve  
performance.  
Word Length  
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set  
to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host  
computer.  
Stop Bits  
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits  
can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in  
the host computer.  
Parity  
Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must  
match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
Data Terminal Ready  
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the  
printer is ready to receive data.  
True. Continuously asserts the DTR signal.  
On-Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the  
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.  
Off-Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is  
offline or the internal serial buffer is full.  
On-Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.  
False. Never asserts the DTR signal.  
Request to Send  
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the  
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or  
not the printer is ready to receive data.  
On-Line and BNF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and  
the internal serial buffer is not full.  
Off-Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the  
internal serial buffer is full.  
On-Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.  
False. Never asserts the RTS signal.  
True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.  
Buffer Size In K  
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port  
buffer. You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.  
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may need to  
increase the Buffer Size In K parameter from the default to 16 Kbytes  
to improve performance.  
Poll Character  
This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this  
character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the  
printer (see Series1 protocol). It may be configured from 0 through FF  
hexadecimal.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Poll Response  
This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the  
printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the  
response. It may be configured from 0 through 30.  
Idle Response  
This option is for the Series1 protocol. When enabled, the printer will send a  
response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the  
buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size.  
One Char Enquiry  
The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from  
the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to  
turn on and off this feature.  
Table 4. One Char Enquiry Response Characters  
Printer State  
Response (hex)  
Online and Buffer Not Full  
Online and Buffer Full  
Offline and Buffer Not Full  
Offline and Buffer Full  
20  
21  
22  
23  
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is  
set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series 1, One Char Enquiry is automatically  
disabled.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
Printer Status  
Disabled - Printer status ignored.  
ENQ and ENQ/STX  
When enabled, the printer responds to an ENQ signal by sending a status  
byte to the host. The type of status byte is determined by a Front Panel menu  
selection. The selections allowed are ENQ and ENQ/STX. The ENQ is  
removed from the data stream. The menu selection for enabling the ENQ  
option may only be seen when using a feature file.  
Printer Status  
Bit  
0
Set when the label has printed  
Set when the label is presented  
Set while printer is online.  
Always set.  
1
2
3
Set printing in the batch mode.  
Set during a ribbon fault.  
Set during a paper out fault.  
Always set.  
4
5
6
7
The ENQ/STX status byte is shown below:  
Printer Status  
Bit  
0
Set when the printer is not online or the buffer is full.  
Set when the printer is offline.  
Clear during a paper out fault.  
Always set.  
1
2
3
Always set.  
4
Set during a buffer overflow fault.  
Set during a parity or framing error fault.  
Always clear.  
5
6
7
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional)  
* = Factory Default  
HOST  
INTERFACE  
IEEE 1284  
Prime Signal  
TOF Action  
Buffer Size In  
K
Enable*  
Disable  
Reset*  
Do Nothing  
1*  
(1-16)  
The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and  
supports bidirectional communication. Chapter 5 discusses the available  
modes (Compatibility, Nibble, and Byte) in more detail. Configuration of this  
interface is controlled from the host.  
Prime Signal  
Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host  
asserts the Prime Signal.  
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host  
asserts the Prime Signal.  
TOF Action  
Reset. A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime  
signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the Prime  
Signal parameter is enabled.  
Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is  
asserted from the host.  
Buffer Size In K  
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284  
parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte  
increments.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
HOST INTERFACE Menu  
Ethernet  
* = Factory Default  
HOST  
INTERFACE  
Ethernet  
Buffer Size In  
K
1*  
(1-16)  
The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than  
attach the host directly into the printer. The detailed configuration of this  
option is given in the PrintNet User’s Manual.  
Buffer Size In K  
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet  
buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu  
* = Factory Default  
ETHERNET  
PARAMS  
(from page 54)  
IP Address  
Gateway  
Address  
Subnet Mask  
MAC Address  
NetBIOS  
Protocol  
Novell  
Protocol  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Novell Frame  
PPM Port  
Timeout  
PPM Port  
Number  
Auto Sensing*  
Ethernet II  
3001*  
(0-65535)  
100 secs.*  
(1-255)  
Ethernet 802.2  
Ethernet 802.3  
802.2 Snap  
The ETHERNET PARAMS menu is available only when the Printronix  
PrintNet option is installed. This menu is for configuring your printer for  
network operation.  
For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask  
and MAC Address, refer to the PrintNet User’s Manual.  
You may also enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this  
menu, as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme is used in processing  
Novell signals. See the Novell chapter in the PrintNet User’s Manual for more  
details.  
If the printer is connected to a Printer Manager utility, the PPM Port number  
and PPM Port Timeout settings must match the settings in the Printer  
Manager program. See the appropriate Printer Manager manual for details.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer Control Menu  
Printer Control Menu  
PRINTER  
CONTROL  
Print Intensity  
Page Width  
Page Length  
Print Speed  
0
:
10*  
:
2 inches  
3 inches  
4 inches  
5 inches  
6 inches*  
Width In  
Inches  
Width in MM  
Length in  
Inches  
Length in MM  
20  
00.1 inches  
00.2 inches  
:
2.5 mm  
2.6 mm  
:
00.1 inches  
2.5 mm  
:
:
06.0 inches*  
:
152.4 mm*  
:
04.1 inches*  
104.1 mm*  
99.0 inches  
2514.6 mm*  
Print Mode  
Media Sensor  
Media  
Handling  
Hor Image  
Shift  
Paper Feed  
Shift  
Transfer*  
Direct  
Continuous*  
Tear-Off Strip  
Tear-Off  
Peel-Off  
Cut  
None*  
Reflective  
Transmissive  
-1.00 inches  
-0.50 inches  
:
:
0.00 inches*  
:
1.00 inches  
0.00 inches*  
:
2.00 inches  
Ver Image  
Shift  
Calibrate  
Tear Strip  
Time  
Clip Page  
Error  
Recovery  
1 second*  
-1.00 inches  
Run Calibrate  
Refl Value  
10* (0-20)  
Trans Value  
10* (0-20)  
Enable*  
Disable  
Disable*  
Enable  
:
:
60 seconds  
0.00 inches*  
:
6.00 inches  
Sensed Distance  
0.00 inches*  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Page Width  
This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed. The value  
can be specified in inches or millimeters. The allowable range in inches is  
00.1 to the maximum print width of the printer 4.1 inches, in 00.1 inch  
increments. The allowable range in millimeters is 2.5 to 104.1 in 1-millimeter  
increments. The factory default value is 4.1 inches, or 104.1 millimeters.  
Page Length  
This option specifies the user-selected Page Length in inches or millimeters.  
In most applications this user-selected Page Length will match the Physical  
page length. Physical page length is the actual label length of the media  
installed.  
Physical page length for transmissive media represents the leading edge to  
trailing edge distance of the die-cut label. It does not include the distance of  
the transmissive gap.  
Physical page length for reflective media is the distance from the trailing edge  
of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next black mark.  
NOTE: When using reflective media it is recommended that the user-  
selected Page Length be set approximately 0.10 inches less than the  
physical page length distance or intermittent shifting of TOF (Top-of-  
Form) position or page skip may result.  
When continuous media with no transmissive gap, or black stripe is installed  
(no predetermined length) and the Media Sensor option = None, the user-  
selected Page Length under the PRINTER CONTROL menu will determine  
the length of the physical page.  
When transmissive or reflective media is installed (media with a  
predetermined physical page length established by a transmissive gap, notch,  
hole or black mark) the user should set the Page Length value to match the  
predetermined physical length of the media.  
When the user-selected Page Length value is shorter than the physical page  
length of the transmissive or reflective media, the printer will leave a blank  
space the remaining distance of the physical page and advance the media to  
the next TOF position. When user-selected Page Length is longer than the  
physical page length, the printer will print the remaining part of the label on  
the next page and then advance to the next TOF position. However, if the Clip  
Page menu option = Enabled, the printer will clip the page to fit the physical  
page and the data not printed will be lost. See Appendix C for details  
regarding user-selected page length vs. physical page length.  
The PRINTER CONTROL menu Page Length value will override and change  
the LinePrinter+ menu Absolute Form Length value.  
If the LinePrinter +, PGL or VGL Host Form Length = Enabled in the  
configuration menu, then Host Form Length software commands will override  
and change the PRINTER CONTROL Page Length value. The sent Host  
Form Length value can be viewed under the Page Length option in the  
configuration menu.  
If the Lineprinter +, PGL or VGL Host Form Length = Disable, then Host Form  
Length software commands will have no effect on the PRINTER CONTROL  
menu Page Length value.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Control Menu  
The allowable Page Length range is 00.1 to 99.0 inches in 00.1 inch  
increments (2.5 - 2514.6mm) The factory default is 06.0 inches (152.4 mm).  
Page Length range is limited to a maximum value of 47.0 inches (1193.8 mm)  
when Page Width is set to 4.1 inches. Decreasing (narrowing) the Page Width  
to 1.7 inches will extend the range limits of the Page Length and permit a  
longer Page Length selection (99.0 inches maximum).  
Print Speed  
This option specifies the speed at which the media passes through the printer.  
This parameter has a significant effect on print quality (see Print Intensity  
below).  
Print Intensity  
This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used  
for the type of media and ribbon installed.  
Large numbers imply more heat (thermal energy) to be applied for each dot.  
This has a significant effect on print quality. The print intensity and speed  
must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality  
and barcode grades.  
Print Mode  
This option specifies the type of printing to be done.  
Direct - indicates the Direct Thermal type of printing (no ribbon) and requires  
special heat sensitive media.  
Transfer - indicates the Thermal Transfer type of printing (ribbon installed).  
Media Sensor  
This option specifies whether either of the label sensors (Reflective or  
Transmissive) are enabled.  
None - Indicates that continuous media with no black strip and no  
transmissive gap is being used. Forms length is based on the Page Length  
value, located under the Printer Control Menu.  
Reflective - Indicates media with a horizontal black mark on the back side of  
the liner is being used. The trailing edge of the black mark establishes the top-  
of-form position.  
Transmissive - Indicates media with a space or “gap” between die cut labels is  
being used, where the media backing or liner is present between labels.  
Transmissive sensing is also used to detect pre-punched notches or holes in  
butt-cut or tag stock media. The trailing edge of the “gap” or notch establishes  
the top-of-form position.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Media Handling  
This option specifies how the printer will handle the media (paper or tag  
stock).  
Continuous. Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front or  
rewinds the printed media onto the internal rewinder. The label taken  
sensor gate should be in the up (disabled) position to support continuous.  
Tear-Off Strip. Prints until the print buffer is empty, then positions the last  
label over the tear-off bar for removal. The label taken sensor gate should  
be in the up (disabled) position to support tear-off strip.  
Tear-Off. After each label is printed, the printer positions the label over  
the tear off bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the  
next one (on-demand printing). A LABEL PRESENT/Remove Label  
message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next  
one can be printed. The label taken sensor gate must be in the down  
(enabled) position to support tear-off.  
Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.  
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next  
one (on-demand printing). The label backing is rewound on the internal  
rewinder. A LABEL PRESENT/Remove Label message will display to  
remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed. The  
label taken sensor gate must be in the down (enabled) position to support  
peel-off.  
Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts  
media after each label is printed or can cut after a specified number of  
labels have been printed using a software cut command. It cuts  
continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock. The label taken sensor gate  
must be in the up (disabled) position to support cut.  
Paper Feed Shift  
This option represents the distance to advance a label when the Tear-Off  
Strip, Tear-Off, Peel-Off, or Cut media handling option is enabled.  
Hor Image Shift  
This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left (-) or right  
(+) for precise positioning on the page. The actual width of the image is not  
affected by this parameter. The allowable range is -1.00 through +1.00 inches  
in .01 inch increments, displayed as xx/100. The factory default value in  
inches is 0.  
Ver Image Shift  
This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up (-) or down (+)  
for precise positioning on the page. The actual height of the image is not  
affected by this parameter. The allowable range is -1.00 through +6.00 inches  
in .01 inch increments, displayed as xx/100. The factory default value in  
inches is 0.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer Control Menu  
Calibrate  
This feature is used to optimize the sensitivity of the Transmissive or  
Reflective sensors (whichever is selected in the Media Sensor sub-menu) in  
being able to detect the TOF (Top-of-Form) position of the current media  
installed. The sensitivity can be adjusted manually by changing the Refl Value  
or Trans Value menu settings or can be determined automatically by using  
the Run Calibrate procedure.  
The change in values (derived automatically or manually entered) take affect  
immediately within the current configuration menu. They can be saved into  
non-volatile memory (menu’s 1-8 only) by using the Save Configuration  
procedure. We highly recommend that you take advantage of the Trans or  
Refl Values automatically determined by the Run Calibrate procedure before  
attempting to make any manual changes to the Values. If the Run Calibrate  
procedure fails to determine the proper values and ends with a fault message  
displayed (“GAP NOT DETECTED” or “LOAD PAPER”), you can manually  
enter the Refl Value or Trans Value and press the FEED key to determine if  
the gap or black stripe can be consistently detected.  
Run Calibrate. Pressing the ENTER key with Run Calibrate displayed  
initializes the automatic calibration procedure. This advances the media a  
minimum of 11 inches plus the distance required to detect 3 additional  
TOF positions. The procedure is successfully completed if no fault  
message is displayed and the Sensed Distance value is correct. The  
result is that the Refl Value or Trans Value (depending on which media  
type is installed) and the Sensed Distance value will be determined  
automatically.  
Refl Value. Value representing the sensitivity for distinguishing the  
difference between the black mark and label liner or tag stock for  
Reflective media. The value range is (0-20) and the default value is 10.  
This value can be determined automatically by using the Run Calibrate  
procedure or can be entered manually. Too high a value causes a “GAP  
NOT DETECTED” error message displayed, too low a value causes a  
“LOAD PAPER” error message.  
Trans Value. Value representing the sensitivity for distinguishing the  
difference between the label and the transmissive gap (hole, notch or  
label liner) for Transmissive media. The value range is (0-20) with a  
default of 10. This value can be determined automatically by using the  
Run Calibrate procedure or can be entered manually. Too high a value  
causes a “LOAD PAPER” error message displayed, too low a value  
causes a “GAP NOT DETECTED” message.  
Sensed Distance. This value (in inches) represents the distance that  
was sensed between the TOF of one label to the TOF of the next label.  
With Transmissive media installed the distance equals the physical label  
length + one transmissive gap, notch or hole. With Reflective media  
installed the distance equals the trailing edge of one black mark to the  
trailing edge of the next. The factory default for Sensed Distance is 0.00  
inches. This value is automatically determined only after successful  
completion of the Run Calibrate procedure and cannot be changed  
manually.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Tear-Strip Time  
When using Tear-Off Strip media handling, the Tear-Strip Time option  
specifies the number of seconds after the buffer is empty that the printer will  
wait before it advances media to the tear off position.  
Clip Page  
This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for  
one physical page length.  
Disabled. When the user selected page length is greater than the  
physical page length, the printer continues to print the remaining excess  
data onto the next physical page. The media sensor looks for the gap  
notch, hole, or black mark only after the label has advanced the distance  
specified by the Page Length value in the Printer Control menu, or by the  
host forms Length value sent via host software. Any gaps, holes, notches,  
or black marks that exist prior to reaching the Page Length or Host Forms  
Length value will be ignored.  
Enable. When the user selected page length is greater than the physical  
page length, the printer clips the excess data to fit the physical page. The  
excess data is lost. The media sensor will constantly look for the gap,  
notch, hole, or black mark, and when detected will use it as the Top-Of-  
Form Position for the next page and clip any excess data for the previous  
page.  
Error Recovery  
This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when  
an error occurred.  
Disabled. The printer will not reprint the label that was printing when the  
error condition occurred.  
Enable. The printer reprints the label that was printing when the error  
condition occurred.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Font Memory Menu  
Font Memory Menu  
This option allows the user to set the amount of memory reserved for scalable  
font caching. The maximum amount of memory which can be selected is  
determined by the total amount of memory installed in the printer.  
Font Memory  
Max Char  
Memory  
Max  
Cache Size  
Max  
Cached Char  
Max Cache  
Memory  
Max Fonts  
Loaded  
1 Font  
2 Fonts  
3 Fonts  
4 Fonts  
5 Fonts*  
6 Fonts  
.
1 Kbytes*  
2 Kbytes  
3 Kbytes  
4 Kbytes  
5 Kbytes  
6 Kbytes  
.
50 KBytes  
100 KBytes  
150 KBytes  
200 KBytes  
250 KBytes  
300 KBytes*  
.
50 Characters  
100 Characters  
150 Characters  
200 Characters  
250 Characters  
300 Characters  
.
50 KBytes  
100 KBytes  
150 KBytes  
200 KBytes*  
250 KBytes  
300 KBytes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20 Fonts  
20 Kbytes  
900 KBytes  
900 Characters*  
900 KBytes  
Font  
Weight  
Installed  
Fonts  
Listsinstalled  
fonts  
Extra Bold  
Char.  
Standard  
Chars.  
Bold  
Chars  
10  
10  
10  
11  
11  
11  
12  
12  
12  
.
.
.
.
.
.
205*  
260*  
275*  
.
.
.
.
.
.
290  
290  
290  
Figure 5. Font Memory Menu  
Figure 5 shows the Font Memory menu options. These options are further  
described in the sections that follow.  
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are  
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your  
application requires an uncommon font memory configuration.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
Activating Font Memory Options  
After selecting any of the “Font Memory” options, perform the following steps  
to activate the new value:  
1. Save your configuration changes. See the Config. Control menu option  
“Save Configuration” on page 57.  
2. Change the power-up configuration to match the configuration you just  
saved. See the Config. Control menu option “Power-Up Config.” on page  
3. Turn the printer power off and then on again.  
Max Char Memory  
The Maximum Character Memory option specifies the size of the largest  
character that can be printed. To calculate the memory requirement, use this  
equation:  
horizontal vertical  
character  
character  
resolution X resolution X height (inches) X width (inches)  
8
For example, if an application requires a character that is 4 inches high by 2  
inches wide, calculate the Maximum Character Memory value as follows:  
203 X 203 X 4 X 2  
= 41,209  
8
Therefore, select a value that is equal to or greater than 41,209. The closest  
available value is 50 KBytes.  
The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 900 KBytes, in 50 - KByte  
increments. The default value for this parameter is 300 KBytes.  
Max Cache Memory  
The Maximum Cache Memory option specifies the size of the memory block  
that can be allocated to the font cache. The font cache stores bitmaps that are  
created on demand from the font outlines stored on the printer flash. The  
cache allows the printer to print scalable fonts at optimum speed.  
To calculate the memory requirement, use this equation:  
average  
average  
character  
height (inches) X width (inches) X  
character  
horizontal  
resolution X  
vertical  
resolution X  
# of characters  
to be cached  
8
The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 900 KBytes, in 50-KByte  
increments. The default value for this parameter is 200 KBytes.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Font Memory Menu  
Max Cache Size  
The Maximum Cache Size option specifies the maximum number of  
characters that can be stored in the font cache.  
The allowable range is 50 through 900 characters, in 50-character  
increments. The default value for this parameter is 900 characters.  
Max Cached Char  
The Maximum Cached Characters option specifies the size of the largest  
character that can be stored in the font cache. To calculate the memory  
requirement, use this equation:  
character  
character  
horizontal  
vertical  
width (inches)  
height (inches) X  
resolution X resolution X  
8
For example, if an application requires the use of a character that is 1 inch  
high by 1 inch wide, calculate the Maximum Cached Characters value as  
follows:  
203 X 203 X 1 X 1  
= 5,151  
8
Therefore, select a value that is equal to or greater than 5,151. The closest  
available value is 6 KBytes.  
The allowable range is 1 KByte through 20 KBytes, in 1-KByte increments.  
The default value for this parameter is 1 KByte.  
Max Fonts Loaded  
The Maximum Fonts Loaded option specifies the number of scalable font  
outlines that can be concurrently loaded into DRAM in the printer.  
The allowable range is 1 through 20 fonts, in 1-font increments. The default  
value for this parameter is 5 fonts.  
NOTE: The above calculations for Maximum Character Memory, Maximum  
Cache Memory, and Maximum Cached Characters assume the  
standard 203 dpi resolution.  
Font Weight  
The Font Weight option specifies the thickness or stroke weight of the text  
fonts. The allowable range is 10 to 290, in increments of 1. The default values  
define the stroke weight for Standard, Bold, and Extra Bold printing.  
Installed Fonts  
The Installed Fonts option provides a list of all fonts currently loaded into  
DRAM.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Menu Options  
DIAGNOSTICS Menu  
* = Factory Default  
1
If Ethernet adapter is present.  
DIAGNOSTICS  
(from page 54)  
Printer Tests  
System  
Memory  
Print Statistics  
X Megabytes  
On: X.X hrs.  
Print: X.X hrs.  
Print Inches  
Checkerboard*  
Grey  
Grid  
Current Config  
Left Test  
Right Test  
1
E-net Test Page  
Printer Tests  
These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer.  
NOTE: Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests.  
They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual.  
Checkerboard. This pattern helps identify marginal printhead elements,  
quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.  
Grey. This pattern helps identify burned out printhead elements and  
uneven print quality.  
Grid. This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and uneven print quality.  
Current Config. Prints the current printer configuration and helps identify  
the text print quality.  
Left Test. This pattern contains a series of ladder-type bar code symbols.  
The first prints four ladder symbols and the last prints a single ladder  
symbol. This pattern helps to identify ribbon wrinkle problems.  
Right Test. This pattern contains a series of ladder-type bar code  
symbols, starting with four, and decrementing by one symbol on each  
print until a single symbol prints. This pattern helps to identify ribbon  
wrinkle problems.  
E-Net Test Page. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet  
adapter (if present).  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DIAGNOSTICS Menu  
System Memory  
Displays the amount of DRAM installed.  
Print Statistics  
You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive  
maintenance purposes. Printer statistics accumulate continuously; they do  
not reset when you turn off the printer. All of the printer statistics are set to  
zero at the factory after burn-in testing.  
On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The  
range is 0 to 30,000 hours.  
Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.  
The range is 0 to 30,000 hours.  
Print Inches. The cumulative number of inches the printer has printed.  
The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 print inches.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
IGP/PGL Emulation  
IGP/PGL Emulation  
The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP)  
for the thermal family of Printronix printers. It is based upon, and is compatible  
with, the Printronix IGP-100/200/400 board using the Printronix Graphics  
Language (PGL). The IGP graphics processing features are detailed below.  
IGP/PGL Features  
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels  
with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic  
functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing  
time.  
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with user-  
selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms  
and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.  
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered  
when the form is created), be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a specific  
location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged with the  
form.  
Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your  
application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar  
codes are available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A  
through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13,  
POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and PDF417. UPC and EAN bar codes can  
specify add-on data.  
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where  
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a  
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up  
to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 12, 13, 15, and 17  
characters per inch (cpi) are available.  
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and  
shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.  
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,  
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees  
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.  
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white  
characters on a dark background.  
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.  
You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields, which includes  
automatic increment or decrement functions.  
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to  
retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical  
density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel  
Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets, each  
96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own  
character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.  
Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also  
containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.  
Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel  
You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel, or by  
control codes as explained in the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.  
The PGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters  
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be  
offline to enter the configuration structure.  
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another  
level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure  
the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements.  
IMPORTANT  
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to see  
all of the current settings.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
IGP/PGL Emulation  
IGP/PGL Submenu  
* = Factory Default  
EMULATION  
IGP/PGL  
Define CR  
Code  
Define LF  
Code  
Autowrap  
Select SFCC  
CR Edit  
PI Slew  
Range  
CR = CR*  
CR = CR + LF  
LF = LF*  
LF = CR + LF  
Disable*  
Enable  
126*  
(1-255)  
16*  
15  
Disable*  
Enable  
Select Font  
Slash 0  
Autoeject  
Select LPI  
Auto  
Uppercase  
Skip Cmd  
Prefix  
(see page 111) Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
6*  
8, 9, 10  
Disable*  
Enable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Do FF  
at TOF  
Power On  
IGP/PGL  
Ext Execute  
Barcode  
Options  
Host Form  
Length  
PGL Normal  
Copy  
Enable*  
Disable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
LP+ Menu*  
PGL Menu  
IGP 100  
Compatbl.  
Ignore Char  
Error  
Report  
Disable*  
Enable  
On*  
Debug Mode  
Fault  
Off  
Ignore Mode  
Select Char  
Disable*  
Enable  
0*  
(0-255)  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IGP/PGL Submenu  
Define CR Code (Carriage Return)  
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into  
the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used  
only if the host computer does not send Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. Does not perform a line feed. The next print position will be  
print position 1 of the current line.  
CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position  
will be print position 1 of the next line.  
Define LF Code (Line Feed)  
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code  
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in  
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send  
Carriage Returns to the printer.  
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print  
position will be the current print position of the next line.  
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print  
position will be print position 1 of the next line.  
Autowrap  
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of  
text exceeds the right margin.  
Disable. Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR + LF  
is received.  
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.  
Select SFCC  
You can specify which dec code (1-255) will be used as the Special Function  
Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC denotes  
that the following data is a PGL command.  
PI Slew Range  
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.  
15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move  
1 line.  
16. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter  
3
IGP/PGL Emulation  
CR Edit  
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.  
Disable. The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by  
line feeds.  
Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are  
not followed by line feeds.  
Select Font  
Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the  
PGL. Refer to page 111 for available selections.  
Slash 0  
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.  
This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.  
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.  
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.  
Autoeject  
If the last page of a job is not full, that is, the data does not fill the entire page,  
you can instruct the printer to eject the page or to stop and hold the page at  
the last print position.  
Enable. The printer ejects the last page after the entire job has been  
processed and printed.  
Disable. The default. The printer does not eject the last page unless you  
send a Page Eject command or until the printer receives another print job.  
Select LPI  
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is  
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.  
Auto Uppercase  
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using  
the ALPHA command.  
Disable. The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.  
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IGP/PGL Submenu  
Skip Command Prefix  
This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL  
command is received.  
Enable. The printer ignores all data before an IGP command.  
Disable. The printer will print all data before an IGP command.  
Power On IGP/PGL  
You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer  
is powered on.  
Enable. The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL  
feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)  
Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL  
feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)  
Extended Execute Copy  
Disable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed if the optional  
Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as part of  
the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.)  
Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form in  
which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In  
this case, the exact same form (with identical dynamic data) is printed for  
whatever the Form Count is. However, incremental data is not  
incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same, the  
overlay data is only printed with the first form and not subsequent forms,  
and each form is printed on a separate page.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
IGP/PGL Emulation  
Barcode Options  
* = Factory Default  
Barcode  
Options  
UPC  
Descenders  
Optimized  
Ratio  
I-2/5 Selection AI 00 Spaces  
Select SO  
Char  
Always*  
Never  
Only with PDF  
Disable*  
Enable  
Leading Zero* Disable*  
Trailing Space Enable  
X2 DPD  
14*  
(0-255)  
Modulo 7 CD  
The following sub-options help define specific options regarding barcode  
printing.  
UPC Descenders  
This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human  
readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.  
Always. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there  
is no human readable data.  
Never. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is no  
human readable data.  
Only with PDF. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only  
when the PDF command is presented.  
Optimized Ratio  
This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including  
Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. It is included for compatibility with the IGP-  
X00 printers.  
Disable. Use standard bar code ratios.  
Enable. Select the alternate bar code ratios.  
Interleaved 2/5 Selection  
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.  
Usually, if Interleaved 2/5 bar codes have an odd number of digits, a leading  
zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00  
customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of  
the bar code instead.  
Leading Zero. A leading zero is inserted in front of the data.  
Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the data instead of a  
leading zero.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGP/PGL Submenu  
X2 DPD. When selected, I-2/5 bar code with a magnification X2 will use  
the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for  
compatibility issues.  
Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of  
the default modulo 10 check digit.  
AI 00 Spaces  
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application  
identifier (AI) is 00.  
Disable. The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed in  
parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.  
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated  
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.  
Select SO Char.  
Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place  
of SO (Shift Out) as the control code which allows access for the alternate set  
of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes  
in the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual for details.  
Host Form Length  
Determines how the physical page size is affected upon an EXECUTE  
command.  
Disable. Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the physical  
page size. Therefore, the size of the form (defined in CREATE mode)  
must fit within the current page dimensions, or errors may occur.  
Enable. The physical page length will change to match the form length  
(defined in CREATE mode). The physical page size remains at the new  
setting until another EXECUTE command is received, or the PRINTER  
CONTROL menu settings are changed.  
NOTE: Changing the form length via the EXECUTE command changes the  
LP+ logical dimensions.  
PGL Normal  
This parameter allows you to select whether the attributes associated with  
text printed in the PGL Normal mode are controlled by the PGL menu or the  
LinePrinter Plus menu.  
LP+ Menu. The default. PGL Normal mode text is printed with the  
attributes defined in the LinePrinter Plus menu.  
PGL Menu. PGL Normal mode text default is printed with the attributes  
defined in the PGL menu.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
IGP/PGL Emulation  
Do FF at TOF  
Determines whether the printer, with media already set at the TOF (Top-of-  
form) position, will advance media to the next TOF position upon receipt of a  
FF command.  
Enable. The printer will advance media from the present TOF position to  
the next TOF position upon receipt of a FF command, causing a blank  
form.  
Disable. The printer will not advance media from the present TOF  
position to the next TOF position upon receipt of a FF command.  
IGP 100 Compatibility  
This parameter forces the output to correspond with IGP-100 printer output in  
cases where there are differences. The default is disable.  
Ignore Character  
Ignore Mode  
This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the  
Select Character menu.  
Disable. The PGL does not ignore any characters.  
Enable. The PGL ignores the character specified in the Select Character  
menu.  
Select Character  
Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the host.  
Error Report  
Sets the error reporting capability on the printer for PGL forms.  
On. Null error boundry checking is reported (printed). Any element that  
cannot fit on the current page is reported (printed) as an error message.  
Debug Mode. Each line of the CREATE form will be printed along with an  
error message if one occurred. It has the same functionaility as when a  
slash was entered in the command before the CREATE form name.  
Fault. The printer will halt if an IGP/PGL error occurs. When “Fault” is  
selected, the IGP/PGL error will be printed and the message “IGP/PGL  
Error” will be displayed on the front panel, followed by the printer going  
offline.  
Off. No label boundry checking takes place. Graphics elements such as  
alpha, line, barcodes etc. will be printed and clipped if they exceed the  
page boundaries.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IGP/PGL Submenu  
IGP/PGL Character Set Menu  
* = Factory Default  
Select Font  
Standard Sets*  
Arabic Sets  
Cyrillic Sets  
European Sets  
Greek Sets  
0) ASCII*  
1) German  
2) Swedish  
ASMO 449*  
ASMO 449+  
ASMO 708  
Code Page 866*  
Cyrillic CP 437  
Cyrillic 113  
Latin 2 8859-2*  
Code Page 852  
Mazovia  
DEC 256 Greek*  
ELOT 928 Greek  
Greek 3  
3) Danish  
4) Norwegian  
5) Finnish  
6) English  
7) Dutch  
8) French  
9) Spanish  
10) Italian  
11) Turkish  
12-23) Reserved  
24-31) User Defined  
32) Code Page 437  
33) Code Page 850  
ASMO 708+  
MS DOS CP710  
MS DOS CP720  
Sakr CP 714  
Aptec CP715  
CP 786  
IBM CP 864  
IBM CP 1046  
Arabic Lam 1  
Arabic Lam 2  
Cyrillic 8859-5  
ISO 915  
Code Page 855  
Cyrillic 7-bit  
Ukrainian  
Kamenicky  
Roman 8  
PC-437 Slavic  
Slavic 1250  
Code Page 865  
Code Page 860  
Latin 1 8859-1  
Latin 5 8859-9  
Latin 9 8859-15  
Polish POL 1  
Win. CP 1250  
Win CP 1252  
Win CP 1257  
ABY Greek  
ABG Greek  
ELOT 927 Greek  
Greek 851  
Greek 437  
Bulgarian  
Greek 8859-7  
Hebrew Sets  
Turkish Sets  
Hebrew Old*  
Hebrew New  
Hebrew DEC  
Latin-1 Hebrew  
Data Gen. Turkish*  
DEC Turkish  
IBM Turkish  
Siemens Turkish  
PTT Turkish  
IBC Turkish  
Bull Turkish  
AS400 Turkish  
Unisys Turkish  
NCR Turkish  
PST Turkish  
UNIS-1 Turkish  
Code Page 853  
INFO Turkish  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
IGP/VGL Emulation  
IGP/VGL Emulation  
Code V Graphics language (VGL) is an Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP)  
software emulation designed for your thermal printer. The IGP Code V  
emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming language produces  
on-line forms, bar codes, and alphanumeric text-generation. The graphics  
processing features are detailed below.  
IGP/VGL Features  
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels  
with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all  
graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and  
processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal,  
solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special  
alphanumeric print features.  
Variable Bar Codes allow the bar code for your application to print with  
standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available  
bar codes are: Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and  
C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, MSI, UPC-A,  
UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is  
available only in the horizontal direction. The IBARC bar code command  
prints bar codes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated 180 or  
rotated 270 degrees.  
Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.  
Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous  
range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed  
print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 cpi (characters per  
inch), permitting up to 170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi).  
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,  
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees  
clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring The VGL With The Control Panel  
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of  
print and shading features, providing a “customized” appearance for forms,  
reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV®, GS-Mark,  
UL®, and CSA® symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL, and  
you can also define custom symbols.  
Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing  
white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded  
background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing  
may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs.  
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.  
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and bar code data fields can be identified and  
automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a  
specified reference point.  
Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets.  
Based on the Multinational Character Set, you may create your own character  
sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory.  
Configuring The VGL With The Control Panel  
You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel, or by  
control codes as explained in the IGP/VGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.  
The VGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters  
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be  
offline to enter the configuration structure.  
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another  
level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure  
the IGP/VGL according to your specific requirements.  
IMPORTANT  
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/VGL, print a configuration sheet to see  
all of the current settings.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
IGP/VGL Emulation  
IGP/VGL Submenu  
* = Factory Default  
EMULATION  
(IGP/VGL)  
(from page 68)  
SFCC & Pwrup  
Page Format  
Graphics  
Error Handling  
Ignore/DB8  
Options  
Setup  
SFCC  
LPI  
6*-10  
Error Msgs  
Ignore Chars  
Disable*  
Char 1  
Char 2  
Char 1 & 2  
94* (17-255)  
Power Up ^X  
Disable*/Enable  
Power Up ^F  
Disable*/Enable  
Power Up ^PY  
Disable*/Enable  
Enable*/Disable  
Error Markers  
Enable*/Disable  
Offpage Errors  
Disable*/Enable Ignore Ch#1  
Barcode Errors 0* (0-255)  
Btm Margin Ctl  
LP+ Menu  
VGL Text Length  
Text Length  
66*  
Autoeject  
Disable*  
Enable*/Disable Ignore Ch#2  
0* (0-255)  
Enable  
Data Bit 8  
Copy Count 1*-99  
Host Form Length  
Disable*  
Enable*/Disable  
Enable  
Resolution  
Font Options  
PI Control  
Printer PI  
Disable*/Enable  
Host PI  
Disable*/Enable  
Cmd Resolution  
Low Resolution*  
High Resolution  
^Dnn Dot Slew  
Low Resolution*  
High Resolution  
Var Ratio Barcd  
Low Resolution*  
High Resolution  
Max PI 16  
Enable*/Disable  
SFCC & Pwrup  
This option has several suboptions which define the SFCC and power-up  
configuration used with VGL.  
SFCC  
This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value is  
the caret ^ (decimal 94). Valid values are 17 through 255. Throughout this  
manual, the caret is used as the SFCC. Run a configuration printout to  
determine the currently selected SFCC.  
Power Up ^X  
Disable. The default.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IGP/VGL Submenu  
Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default, and selects the  
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored  
until a ^A command is received.  
Power Up ^F  
Disable. The default.  
Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default, and selects  
the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the  
VGL to ignore carriage returns, line feeds and all characters below hex 20  
sent from the host.  
Power Up ^PY  
Disable. The default.  
Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.  
Page Format  
LPI  
Range of 6-10 lines per inch (lpi), with 6 being the default.  
Btm Margin Ctl  
Determines the page’s bottom margin. If this option is set to VGL Text  
Length, then Text Length changes the bottom margin value in the LP+  
sub-menu as follows: bottom = physical page length-top margin-text  
length. If the option is set to LP+ Menu, then a change in text length has  
no effect and the bottom margin setting in the LP+ menu will be used  
although the new text length value still shows in the menu.  
Text Length  
Is the printable length on the page below the top margin. It is in character  
lines at the lpi in effect when the new value is entered.  
Autoeject  
Determines paper handling upon exiting the IGP/VGL Repeated Form  
and Dynamic Form commands. DISABLE holds the print position at the  
bottom of the form. ENABLE issues a form feed after the last form is  
printed so all pages will be physically printed.  
Copy Count  
Determines the number of identical copies of each physical page that will  
be printed.  
Host Forms Length  
Sets the printer page size. DISABLE sets the printer page size equal to  
the Page Length set in the front panel under the PRINTER CONTROL  
menu. ENABLE sets the printer page length equal to the software host  
form length.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
IGP/VGL Emulation  
Graphics Options  
* = Factory Default  
Graphics  
Options  
Slash 0  
Ignore Dots  
Append  
Rotated  
Truncate Alpha True Vert 1/10  
Absorb After  
^PY  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Absorb Motion*  
Absorb All  
Disable  
UPC  
Descenders  
Ignore Spaces  
Midline PY  
Absorb After  
^PN  
Rot. Char Size  
Width Limit  
Enable*  
Disable  
Adjusted*  
Not Adjusted  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Following are several options which configure printing output.  
Slash 0  
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.  
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.  
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.  
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.  
Ignore Dots  
Disable. The default.  
Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only  
1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text.  
Append Rotated  
Disable. Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate  
elements.  
Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,  
counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.  
Truncate Alpha  
When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off  
Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right  
side of the form.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGP/VGL Submenu  
True Vert 1/10  
Disable. When disabled (the default) and in High Resolution, a vertical  
line’s length in one inch and 1/10 inch increments is interpreted as 70/72  
inch and 7/72 inch respectively.  
Enable. When enabled, a vertical line’s length is interpreted exactly,  
which is 72/72 inch in one inch increments.  
Absorb after ^PY  
Absorb Motion. Prevents paper motion following a system terminator in  
a graphics ^PY command.  
Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host  
generated terminator is detected.  
Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to  
the printer and result in paper motion.  
UPC Descenders  
Enable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there is  
no human readable data.  
Disable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is  
no human readable data.  
Rot. Char Size  
Adjusted. Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded characters  
have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size  
parameters.  
Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters will be the same size as  
unrotated characters with the same size parameters.  
Ignore Spaces  
Disable. Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a  
graphics pass.  
Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a  
graphics pass.  
Midline PY (includes ^PN)  
Disable. The Graphics mode Enabled command, ^PY, must be the first  
three characters of a line.  
Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
IGP/VGL Emulation  
Width Limit  
When enabled, the system will limit the length and width for expanded  
characters to a limit shown in Table 5, which shows the maximum width  
allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0 through 4.0  
inches).  
Absorb After ^PN  
Disable. All line terminators that immediately follow the ^PN command  
are sent to the printer and processed.  
Enable. All line terminators that immediately follow the ^PN command are  
ignored.  
Table 5. Width Limit Table  
Height  
Param.  
Max. Width  
Allowed  
Height  
Param.  
Max. Width  
Allowed  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
99  
99  
3
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
51  
53  
56  
58  
61  
63  
66  
68  
71  
73  
76  
78  
81  
83  
86  
88  
91  
93  
96  
98  
6
8
11  
13  
16  
18  
21  
23  
26  
28  
31  
33  
36  
38  
41  
43  
46  
48  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGP/VGL Submenu  
Error Handling  
Following are several options which define how errors are reported.  
Error Msgs  
Enable. Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when  
command parameters are incorrect.  
Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.  
Error Markers  
Enable. Prints the following error markers for those elements that print  
beyond the page boundaries:  
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;  
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the  
page;  
for elements where the starting position of the command contains  
an error other than an off-page error.  
Offpage Errors  
Disable. Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the  
right edge of the page.  
Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right  
edge of the page.  
Barcode Errors  
Enable. An error message will print when invalid bar code data is  
encountered.  
Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal bar code data; the bar code  
will be skipped.  
NOTE: When Barcode Errors is disabled, the VGL emulation will try to make  
the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding  
zeros to the end of bar code data to meet minimum data length  
requirements for some bar codes. Not all errors will be corrected.  
Ignore / DB8 Setup  
Following are several options which define character filtering and data bit 8.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
IGP/VGL Emulation  
Ignore Chars  
Disable. Character filtering is not enabled.  
Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore Ch#1” to  
specify character 1.  
Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore Ch#2” to  
specify character 2.  
Char 1&2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore  
ch#1” and “Ignore Ch#2” to specify values for these characters.  
Ignore Ch#1  
Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values  
are from 0 through 255.  
Ignore Ch#2  
Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values  
are from 0 through 255.  
Data Bit 8  
Enable. The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits  
are used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be  
accessed.  
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally indicates  
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8, and enable the Host PI  
configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).  
NOTE: Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal, but never  
both. When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI  
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data  
and not to interpret PI line data.  
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data bit 8 of  
the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot access  
characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access characters in the hex  
80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGP/VGL Submenu  
Resolution  
Cmd Resolution  
Low Res. The default. Sets a low command resolution mode.  
High Res. Sets a high command resolution mode.  
^Dnn Dot Slew  
Low Res. The default. Sets the dot slew command dot values to be  
interpreted as 60 dpi P-Series dots.  
High Res. Sets the dot slew command dot values to be interpreted as  
print engine dots.  
Var Ratio Barcd  
Low Res. The default. Sets dot values to be interpreted as 60 dpi P-  
Series dots.  
High Res. Sets dot values to be interpreted as print engine dots.  
Font Options  
The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the  
VGL. Refer to page 123 for available selections.  
Uniform Fonts  
Disable. The default. The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics  
Mode will be cancelled when the graphics pass is complete.  
Enable. The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will also  
be used in Standard Graphics Mode and Normal Mode.  
Proportional Line Length  
Enable. The default. The position of the next graphic element will be  
determined by the physical length of a text string (when using a  
proportional spaced font).  
Disable. The position of the next graphic element will be determined as if  
the font was monospaced (all characters had the same specified width).  
PI Control  
Printer PI  
Disable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled.  
Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
IGP/VGL Emulation  
Host PI  
Disable. The host does not send PI signals.  
Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option  
must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.  
Max PI 16  
Enable. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.  
Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will  
always move 1 line.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGP/VGL Submenu  
IGP/VGL Character Set Menu  
* = Factory Default  
Font Options  
Font Sets*  
Uniform Fonts  
Prop Line  
Length  
Disable*  
Enable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Standard Sets*  
Arabic Sets  
Cyrillic Sets  
European Sets  
Greek Sets  
0) ASCII*  
ASMO 449*  
ASMO 449+  
ASMO 708  
Code Page 866*  
Cyrillic CP 437  
Cyrillic 113  
Cyrillic 8859-5  
ISO 915  
Code Page 855  
Cyrillic 7-bit  
Ukrainian  
Latin 2 8859-2*  
Code Page 852  
Mazovia  
Kamenicky  
Roman 8  
DEC 256 Greek*  
ELOT 928 Greek  
Greek 3  
ABY Greek  
ABG Greek  
ELOT 927 Greek  
Greek 851  
Greek 437  
1) German  
2) Swedish  
3) Danish  
4) Norwegian  
5) Finnish  
6) English  
7) Dutch  
8) French  
9) Spanish  
10) Italian  
ASMO 708+  
MS DOS CP710  
MS DOS CP720  
Sakr CP 714  
Aptec CP715  
CP 786  
Arabic CP 864  
Arabic CP 1046  
Arabic Lam 1  
Arabic Lam 2  
PC-437 Slavic  
Slavic 1250  
Code Page 865  
Code Page 860  
Latin 1 8859-1  
Latin 5 8859-9  
Latin 9 8859-15  
Polish POL 1  
Win. CP 1250  
Win CP 1252  
Win CP 1257  
Bulgarian  
Greek 8859-7  
11) Turkish  
Code Page 437  
Code Page 850  
Hebrew Sets  
Turkish Sets  
Hebrew Old*  
Hebrew New  
Hebrew DEC  
Latin-1 Hebrew  
Data Gen. Turkish*  
DEC Turkish  
IBM Turkish  
Siemens Turkish  
PTT Turkish  
IBC Turkish  
Bull Turkish  
AS400 Turkish  
Unisys Turkish  
NCR Turkish  
PST Turkish  
UNIS-1 Turkish  
Code Page 853  
INFO Turkish  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
EMULATION  
(from page 68)  
LinePrinter+  
Printer  
Orientation  
CPI/LPI Select  
Font Attributes  
Protocol  
(see next page)  
Portrait*  
Landscape  
Inv. Portrait  
Inv. Landscape  
Select CPI  
10.0 CPI*  
12.0 CPI  
13.3 CPI  
15.0 CPI  
17.1 CPI  
20.0 CPI  
Select LPI  
6.0 LPI*  
(see next page)  
8.0 LPI  
10.3 LPI  
Plot Attributes  
Page Format  
Print Char.  
Set  
Reset Cmd  
CFG Ld  
Horizontal DPI  
120* DPI  
(60-400)  
Vertical DPI  
(72*-400)  
Disable*  
Power up config  
Current config  
Factory config  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LinePrinter Plus Submenus  
LinePrinter Plus Submenus  
* = Factory Default  
Printer  
Protocol  
P-Series  
P-Series XQ  
Serial Matrix  
Proprinter XL  
Epson FX  
Font Attributes  
Typeface  
Prop. Spacing  
Bold Print  
Italic Print  
Slashed Zero  
Disable*  
Text Position  
Letter Gothic*  
Courier  
OCR-A  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Forward Slant Enable  
Backward Slant  
Top of Line*  
Bottom of Line  
OCR-B  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Printer Protocol  
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus  
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more information.  
Orientation  
Portrait. Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the height of a  
page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is parallel to the  
leading edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with  
the operator viewing the front of the printer.  
4 Inches  
FEED  
.
d i a m e t h e  
6 inches  
e o f e d n g g e l a d i  
e
t o e t h l l l a r p a  
i s a g e i m t h e  
e o f e d g t o p T h e  
Leading Edge  
Inv. Portrait. Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the  
height of a page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is  
parallel to the trailing edge of the media. The following illustration is an  
example, with the operator viewing the front of the printer.  
Trailing Edge  
4 inches  
The top edge of  
FEED  
the image is  
parallel to the  
trailing edge of the  
6 inches  
media.  
Leading Edge  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LinePrinter Plus Submenus  
Landscape. Landscape refers to horizontal orientation, where the width  
of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the image is the left  
edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with the  
operator viewing the front of the printer.  
4 inches  
FEED  
6 inches  
Leading Edge  
Inv. Landscape. Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation,  
where the width of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the  
image is the right edge of the media (the left edge of the image is the  
trailing edge of the media). The following illustration is an example, with  
the operator viewing the front of the printer.  
4 inches  
FEED  
6 inches  
Leading Edge  
CPI/LPI Select  
This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) and lines per  
inch (lpi) values.  
Font Attributes  
Typefaces  
Letter Gothic. The default. Letter Gothic is a non-proportional  
(monospaced) sans serif font where all of the characters take up the  
same amount of space when printed.  
Courier. Courier is a non-proportional (monospaced) font where all  
characters take up the same amount of space when printed.  
OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi  
horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Proportional Spacing  
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the  
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.  
Disable. Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column  
in the printed text will line up.  
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the  
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using  
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed  
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.  
This example is printed with  
proportional spacing enabled  
Bold Print  
Disable. Text is printed normally.  
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.  
Italic Print  
Disable. Text is printed normally.  
Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.  
Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.  
Slash Zero  
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.  
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.  
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.  
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LinePrinter Plus Submenus  
Text Position  
Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space. When set to Top  
of Line, text will be positioned at the top of the line space. When set to Bottom  
of Line, the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi line  
space. The following example shows both Top of Line and Bottom of Line text  
positions:  
Dot  
Row  
Top of Linespace  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace  
9
10  
11  
Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace12  
Text Position  
Top of Line  
Text Position  
Bottom of Line  
Plot Attributes  
This feature enables the T4204 to print images as close as possible to the  
same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix or laser printer by  
selecting a horizontal and vertical resolution that matches that of the printer  
that the file was originally generated for.  
Although the range allows a selection of up to 400 dpi, the T4204 is only  
capable of printing up to 203 dpi horizontal and vertical resolution.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Page Format  
* = Factory Default  
1
These menus do not  
Page Format  
appear if the Coax or  
Twinax host interface is  
selected. See page 77.  
Form Length  
Form Width  
Host Forms  
Length  
Margins  
Perforation  
Skip  
1
1
Disable*  
Enable  
Absolute Length  
6* inches  
Absolute Width  
4.1* inches  
Logical Form  
Left Margin  
Disable*  
1/2 inch  
1
(00.0-24.0)  
Funct. of LPI  
36* lines  
(0.0-13.6)  
Funct. of CPI  
41* Characters  
(1-272)  
0* characters  
(0-369)  
Right Margin  
0* characters  
(0-369)  
2/3 inch  
5/6 inch  
1 inch  
1
(0-144)  
Top Margin  
0 linespaces*  
(0-451)  
Bottom Margin  
0* linespaces  
(0-451)  
Physical Page  
1
Left Margin  
0* inches  
(0-13.20)  
Right Margin  
1
0* inches  
(0-13.20)  
Top Margin  
0 inches*  
(0-24.00)  
Bottom Margin  
0* inches  
(0-24.00)  
Margins - Logical Form  
Left Margin. Set in characters. Character zero is defined as the far left  
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.  
Right Margin. Set in characters. Character zero is defined as the far right  
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.  
Top Margin. Defined in linespaces, starting from line zero at the top of the  
page and incrementing from the top down.  
Bottom Margin. Defined in linespaces, starting from line zero at the  
bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LinePrinter Plus Submenus  
Margins - Physical Page  
Left Margin. Set in inches. Inch zero is defined as the far left edge of the  
page, and column numbering increments from left to right.  
Right Margin. Set in inches. Inch zero is defined as the far right edge of  
the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.  
Top Margin. Defined in inches, starting from inch zero at the top of the  
page and incrementing from the top down.  
Bottom Margin. Defined in inches, starting from inch zero at the bottom  
of the page and incrementing from the bottom up.  
Perforation Skip  
Disable. Allows printing on page perforation.  
You may set up a skip-over margin of 1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1  
inch. For example, a skip-over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at  
the bottom of the page.  
Forms Length  
Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set  
forms length in inches, or as a function of the current LPI (lines per inch).  
Form Width  
The forms width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the  
current CPI (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the  
actual paper width.  
Host Forms Length  
Disable. The default. Sets the form length equal to the PRINTER  
CONTROL menu Page Length value.  
Enable. Sets the form length equal to the form length specified in a host  
software command.  
NOTE: When the optional CTHI (Coax/Twinax Host Interface) is selected  
Host Forms Length must be set to Disable.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
LinePrinter Plus P-Series Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
Printer  
Protocol  
P-Series  
Control Code  
06  
Auto LF  
Control Code  
08  
Define CR  
Code  
Overstrike  
Define LF  
Code  
6.0 LPI  
8.0 LPI*  
10.3 LPI  
Elongated*  
Backspace  
CR = CR*  
CR = CR + LF Enable  
Disable*  
Enable*  
Disable  
LF = CR + LF*  
LF = LF  
SFCC d  
Command  
PSeries  
Dbl High  
Select SFCC  
EVFU Select  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Character Set  
Even dot plot* Normal *  
1*  
Enable*  
Disable  
Control Code* (see page 135)  
Printable  
Double high  
P3/4/6/9 Compat  
(0-7F hex)  
FF Valid at  
TOF  
Enable*  
Disable  
Control Code 06  
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can  
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8 or 10.3 LPI.  
Control Code 08  
Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can  
define the code to output an elongated character or a backspace.  
Define CR Code  
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage  
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each  
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed  
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host  
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
LinePrinter Plus P-Series Emulation  
Auto LF  
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the  
forms width setting.  
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.  
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is  
received past the forms width.  
Overstrike  
Overstrike determines the action required when a line is printed over a  
previous line because a carriage return was received without a line feed.  
Enable. Prints the second line on top of the first line.  
Disable. Replaces the characters from the first line with the second line.  
Define LF Code  
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed  
command. The next print position is position 1 of the next line.  
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print  
position will be the current print position of the next line.  
Select SFCC  
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the  
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter. P-Series codes  
can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:  
ESC (hex 1B)  
SOH (hex 01)  
ETX (hex 03)  
CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)  
TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)  
NOTE: SOH, ETX and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)  
are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data  
stream if either is chosen as a delimiter, or print errors will occur.  
EVFU Select  
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.  
Enable. The default. Selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical  
Format Unit (EVFU).  
Disable. Disables all EVFU processing.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex  
9F as control codes or as printable characters.  
Character Set  
Specifies a character set as shown in the page 135. To use one of these sets,  
choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press  
ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8)  
and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to  
indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character  
Sets Reference Manual.  
SFCC d Command  
Even dot plot. This option interprets Speed Command as even dot plot.  
Double high. This option interprets Speed Command as double high.  
Select this option for backward compatibility.  
PSeries Dbl High  
Normal. This normal Double High printing for current and older model  
printers.  
P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers printed two dot rows higher, this  
option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match  
the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower).  
FF Valid at TOF  
Enable. Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed  
command and the printer is at the top of form.  
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed  
command and the printer is at the top of form.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LinePrinter Plus P-Series Emulation  
P-Series Character Set Menu  
* = Factory Default  
Character Set  
Standard Sets*  
Cyrillic Sets  
European Sets  
Arabic Sets  
Greek Sets  
Hebrew Sets  
DEC 256 Greek*  
ELOT 928 Greek  
Greek 3  
ABY Greek  
ABG Greek  
ELOT 927 Greek  
Greek 851  
Greek 437  
ASMO 449*  
ASMO 449+  
ASMO 708  
ASMO 708+  
MSDOS CP710  
MSDOS CP720  
Sakr CP 714  
Aptec CP715  
CP 786  
Arabic CP 864  
Arabic CP 1046  
Arabic Lam 1  
Arabic Lam 2  
Cyrillic 866*  
Cyrillic CP 437  
Cyrillic 113  
Cyrillic 8859-5  
ISO 915  
Code Page 855  
Cyrillic 7-bit  
Ukrainian  
Latin 2 8859-2*  
Code Page 852  
Mazovia  
Kamenicky  
Roman 8  
Hebrew Old*  
Hebrew New  
Hebrew DEC  
Latin-1 Hebrew  
PC-437 Slavic  
Slavic 1250  
Code Page 865  
Code Page 860  
Latin 1 8859-1  
Latin 5 8859-9  
Latin 8859-15  
Polish POL 1  
Win. CP 1250  
Win CP 1252  
Win CP 1257  
Greek 8859-7  
Bulgarian  
Turkish Sets  
Data Gen. Turk.*  
DEC Turkish  
IBM Turkish  
Siemens Turkish  
PTT Turkish  
IBC Turkish  
Bull Turkish  
AS400 Turkish  
Unisys Turkish  
NCR Turkish  
PST Turkish  
UNIS-1 Turkish  
Code Page 853  
INFO Turkish  
IBM PC*  
ECMA Latin 1  
DEC  
Multinational  
Multinational  
Primary Subset  
ASCII (USA)*  
French  
ASCII (USA)*  
EBCDIC  
Primary Subset  
ASCII (USA)*  
German  
ASCII (USA)*  
French  
German  
German  
Swedish  
English  
English  
Danish  
Swedish  
Danish  
Norwegian  
Finnish  
Norweg./Danish  
Swedish  
Italian  
Italian  
English  
Spanish  
Spanish  
Japanese  
French Canadian  
Latin American  
Norwegian  
Danish II  
Dutch  
French  
Spanish  
Italian  
Japanese  
French Canadian  
Dutch  
Finnish  
Swiss  
Turkish  
Japanese  
Extended Subset  
Multinational*  
Spanish II  
OCR-B  
OCR-A  
Latin Am II  
Extended Subset  
Code Page 437*  
Code Page 850  
Barcode 10 CPI  
Mult. DP 10 CPI  
Mult. DP 12 CPI  
Mult. LQ 10 CPI  
Greek DP 10 CPI  
Greek DP 12 CPI  
Greek LQ 10 CPI  
Grap. DP 10 CPI  
Grap. LQ 10 CPI  
Sci. DP 10 CPI  
Sci. DP 12 CPI  
Sci. LQ 10 CPI  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
LinePrinter Plus P-Series XQ Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
Printer  
Protocol  
P-Series XQ  
Control Code  
06  
Auto LF  
Define LF  
Code  
Define CR  
Code  
Compressed  
Print  
Elong/Alt.  
Font  
6.0 LPI  
CR = CR*  
Disable*  
LF = CR + LF* char 01 SOH* Elng=BS Font=SO*  
8.0 LPI*  
10.3 LPI  
CR = CR + LF Enable  
LF = LF  
char 03 ETX  
char 09 HT  
Elng=SO Font=BS  
Gothic  
Typeface  
EVFU Select  
Upr. Case  
Select  
Slew Relative  
char 02 STX*  
char 03 ETX  
char 09 HT  
Enable*  
Disable  
Disable*  
Enable  
1-16 Lines*  
1-15 Lines  
Control Code 06  
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can  
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8 or 10.3 LPI.  
Define CR Code  
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage  
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each  
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed  
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host  
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.  
Auto LF  
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the  
forms width setting.  
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.  
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is  
received past the forms width.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
LinePrinter Plus P-Series XQ Emulation  
Define LF Code  
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed  
command received. The next print position is position 1 of the next line.  
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed  
command is received. The next print position will be the current print  
position of the next line.  
Compressed Print  
Controls which host command sets compressed printing.  
CHAR 01 SOH  
CHAR 03 ETX  
CHAR 09 HT  
Elong/Alt. Font  
Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and  
extended character set.  
ELNG=BS (hex 08) FONT=SO (hex 0E)  
ELNG=SO FONT=BS  
Gothic Typeface  
Controls which host command sets high speed printing.  
CHAR 02 STX  
CHAR 03 ETX  
CHAR 09 HT  
EVFU Select  
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. Choices are:  
Enable. The default. Selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical  
Format Unit (EVFU).  
Disable. Disables all VFU processing.  
Upper Case Select  
Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the  
host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.  
Disable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as  
lowercase, and uppercase characters received from the computer as  
uppercase.  
Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as  
their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters  
received from the computer are printed as uppercase.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Slew Relative  
“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the  
number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew  
Relative command is received.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LinePrinter Plus Serial Matrix Emulation  
LinePrinter Plus Serial Matrix Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
Printer  
Protocol  
Serial Matrix  
Control Code  
06  
Overstrike  
Define CR  
Code  
Auto LF  
Define LF  
Code  
Printer Select  
6.0 LPI  
8.0 LPI*  
10.3 LPI  
CR = CR*  
CR = CR + LF Disable  
Enable*  
Enable*  
Disable  
LF = LF*  
LF = CR + LF  
Disable*  
Enable  
SFCC d  
Alt. Set 80-9F Character Set  
Command  
Even dot plot*  
Double high  
Control Code*  
Printable  
Control Code 06  
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can  
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8 or 10.3 LPI.  
Define CR Code  
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage  
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each  
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed  
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host  
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.  
Auto LF  
The Auto LF option defines the printer actions when print data is received past  
the forms width setting.  
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is  
received past the forms width.  
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Overstrike  
Overstrike determines the action required when a line is printed over a  
previous line because a carriage return was received without a line feed.  
Enable. Prints the second line on top of the first line.  
Disable. Replaces the characters from the first line with the second line.  
Define LF Code  
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed  
command is received. The next print position will be the current print  
position of the next line.  
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed  
command received. The next print position is position 1 of the next line.  
Printer Select  
Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.  
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and  
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.  
Alternate Set 80-9F  
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a  
control code.  
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.  
Character Set  
Specifies a character set as shown in the page 141. To use one of these sets,  
choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press  
ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8)  
and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to  
indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character  
Sets Reference Manual.  
SFCC d Command  
Even dot plot. This option interprets Speed Command as even dot plot.  
Double high. This option interprets Speed Command as double high.  
Select this option for backward compatibility.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
LinePrinter Plus Serial Matrix Emulation  
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu  
* = Factory Default  
Character Set  
Standard Sets*  
Cyrillic Sets  
European Sets  
Arabic Sets  
Greek Sets  
Hebrew Sets  
ASMO 449*  
ASMO 449+  
ASMO 708  
ASMO 708+  
MSDOS CP710  
MSDOS CP720  
Sakr CP 714  
Aptec CP715  
CP 786  
Arabic CP 864  
Arabic CP 1046  
Arabic Lam 1  
Arabic Lam 2  
Cyrillic 866*  
Cyrillic CP 437  
Cyrillic 113  
Cyrillic 8859-5  
ISO 915  
Code Page 855  
Cyrillic 7-bit  
Ukrainian  
DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old*  
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New  
Latin 2 8859-2*  
Code Page 852  
Mazovia  
Kamenicky  
Roman 8  
PC-437 Slavic  
Slavic 1250  
Code Page 865  
Code Page 860  
Latin 1 8859-1  
Latin 5 8859-9  
Latin 9 8859-15  
Polish POL 1  
Win. CP 1250  
Win CP 1252  
Win CP 1257  
Greek 3  
Hebrew DEC  
ABY Greek  
ABG Greek  
ELOT 927 Greek  
Greek 851  
Latin-1 Hebrew  
Greek 437  
Greek 8859-7  
Bulgarian  
Turkish Sets  
Data Gen. Turk.*  
DEC Turkish  
IBM Turkish  
Siemens Turkish  
PTT Turkish  
IBC Turkish  
Bull Turkish  
AS400 Turkish  
Unisys Turkish  
NCR Turkish  
PST Turkish  
UNIS-1 Turkish  
Code Page 853  
INFO Turkish  
IBM PC*  
DEC  
Multinational  
Multinational  
ECMA Latin 1  
Primary Subset  
ASCII (USA)*  
French  
ASCII (USA)*  
EBCDIC  
Primary Subset  
ASCII (USA)*  
German  
ASCII (USA)*  
French  
German  
German  
Swedish  
English  
English  
Danish  
Swedish  
Danish  
Norwegian  
Finnish  
Norweg./Danish  
Swedish  
Italian  
Italian  
English  
Spanish  
Spanish  
Japanese  
French Canadian  
Latin American  
Norwegian  
Danish II  
Dutch  
French  
Spanish  
Italian  
Turkish  
Japanese  
Japanese  
French Canadian  
Dutch  
Finnish  
Swiss  
Spanish II  
Extended Subset  
Multinational*  
Barcode 10 CPI  
Mult. DP 10 CPI  
Mult. DP 12 CPI  
Mult. LQ 10 CPI  
Greek DP 10 CPI  
Greek DP 12 CPI  
Greek LQ 10 CPI  
Grap. DP 10 CPI  
Grap. LQ 10 CPI  
Sci. DP 10 CPI  
Sci. DP 12 CPI  
Sci. LQ 10 CPI  
Latin Am II  
Extended Subset  
Code Page 437*  
Code Page 850  
OCR-B  
OCR-A  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
LinePrinter Plus Proprinter XL Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
Printer  
Protocol  
Proprinter XL  
Define CR  
Code  
FF Valid at  
TOF  
Auto LF  
Define LF  
Code  
Character Set  
CR = CR*  
CR = CR + LF  
Enable*  
Disable  
LF = LF*  
LF = CR + LF  
Enable*  
Disable  
20 CPI  
Condensed  
Enable*  
Disable  
Define CR Code  
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage  
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each  
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed  
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host  
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
Auto LF  
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the  
forms width setting.  
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is  
received past the forms width.  
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.  
Define LF Code  
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed  
command is received. The next print position will be the current print  
position of the next line.  
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed  
command received. The next print position is position 1 of the next line.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
LinePrinter Plus Proprinter XL Emulation  
FF Valid At TOF  
Enable. Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed  
command and the printer is at the top of form.  
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed  
command and the printer is at the top of form.  
Character Set  
Specifies a character set as shown in the page 144. To use one of these sets,  
choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press  
ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8)  
and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to  
indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character  
Sets Reference Manual.  
20 CPI Condensed  
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.  
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount  
of information on a page.  
Enable. Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal  
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer.  
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is  
chosen by the host.  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex  
9F as control codes or as printable characters.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Proprinter XL Character Set Menu  
* = Factory Default  
Character Set  
Standard Sets*  
Cyrillic Sets  
European Sets  
Arabic Sets  
Greek Sets  
Hebrew Sets  
ASMO 449*  
ASMO 449+  
ASMO 708  
ASMO 708+  
MSDOS CP710  
MSDOS CP720  
Sakr CP 714  
Aptec CP715  
CP 786  
Arabic CP 864  
Arabic CP 1046  
Arabic Lam 1  
Arabic Lam 2  
Cyrillic 866*  
Cyrillic CP 437  
Cyrillic 113  
Cyrillic 8859-5  
ISO 915  
Code Page 855  
Cyrillic 7-bit  
Ukrainian  
DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old*  
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New  
Latin 2 8859-2*  
Code Page 852  
Mazovia  
Kamenicky  
Roman 8  
PC-437 Slavic  
Slavic 1250  
Code Page 865  
Code Page 860  
Latin 1 8859-1  
Latin 5 8859-9  
Latin 9 8859-15  
Polish POL1  
Polish POL 1  
Win. CP 1250  
Win CP 1252  
Win CP 1257  
Greek 3  
Hebrew DEC  
ABY Greek  
ABG Greek  
ELOT 927 Greek  
Greek 851  
Latin-1 Hebrew  
Greek 437  
Greek 8859-7  
Bulgarian  
Turkish Sets  
Data Gen. Turk.*  
DEC Turkish  
IBM Turkish  
Siemens Turkish  
PTT Turkish  
IBC Turkish  
Bull Turkish  
AS400 Turkish  
Unisys Turkish  
NCR Turkish  
PST Turkish  
UNIS-1 Turkish  
Code Page 853  
INFO Turkish  
Code Page  
437*  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
Multinational  
Code Page  
850  
ASCII (USA)*  
EBCDIC  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX Emulation  
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
Printer  
Protocol  
Epson FX  
Define CR  
Code  
Printer Select  
Auto LF  
Define LF  
Code  
Character Set  
20 CPI  
Condensed  
CR = CR*  
CR = CR + LF  
Enable*  
Disable  
LF = LF*  
LF = CR + LF  
Disable*  
Enable  
(see page 147) Enable*  
Disable  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Control Code*  
Printable  
Define CR Code  
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives  
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is  
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an  
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this  
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.  
Auto LF  
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the  
forms width setting.  
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is  
received past the forms width.  
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
LinePrinter Plus Emulation  
Define LF Code  
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a  
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,  
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage  
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host  
computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.  
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.  
LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra Carriage Return with each Line Feed.  
Printer Select  
Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.  
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and  
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.  
Character Set  
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in  
the page 147. Note that when OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the print  
language, the Font Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu  
(page 127) is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.  
To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as  
European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that  
group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired  
set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in  
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.  
20 CPI Condensed  
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.  
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount  
of information on a page.  
Enable. Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when  
compressed print is chosen by the host computer.  
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is  
chosen by the host.  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex  
9F as control codes or as printable characters.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX Character Set Menu  
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX Character Set Menu  
* = Factory Default  
Character Set  
Standard Sets*  
Cyrillic Sets  
European Sets  
Arabic Sets  
Greek Sets  
Hebrew Sets  
ASMO 449*  
ASMO 449+  
ASMO 708  
ASMO 708+  
MSDOS CP710  
MSDOS CP720  
Sakr CP 714  
Aptec CP715  
CP 786  
Arabic CP 864  
Arabic CP 1046  
Arabic Lam 1  
Arabic Lam 2  
Cyrillic 866*  
Cyrillic CP 437  
Cyrillic 113  
Cyrillic 8859-5  
ISO 915  
Code Page 855  
Cyrillic 7-bit  
Ukrainian  
Latin 2 8859-2*  
Code Page 852  
Mazovia  
Kamenicky  
Roman 8  
DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old*  
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New  
Greek 3  
Hebrew DEC  
ABY Greek  
ABG Greek  
ELOT 927 Greek  
Greek 851  
Latin-1 Hebrew  
PC-437 Slavic  
Slavic 1250  
Code Page 865  
Code Page 860  
Latin 1 8859-1  
Latin 5 8859-9  
Latin 9 8859-15  
Polish POL 1  
Polish POL 1  
Win. CP 1250  
Win CP 1252  
Win CP 1257  
Greek 437  
Greek 8859-7  
Bulgarian  
Turkish Sets  
Data Gen. Turk.*  
DEC Turkish  
IBM Turkish  
Siemens Turkish  
PTT Turkish  
IBC Turkish  
Bull Turkish  
AS400 Turkish  
Unisys Turkish  
NCR Turkish  
PST Turkish  
UNIS-1 Turkish  
Code Page 853  
INFO Turkish  
Epson Set*  
OCR-B  
OCR-A  
ASCII (USA)*  
French  
German  
English  
Danish I  
Swedish  
Italian  
Spanish I  
Japanese  
Norwegian  
Danish II  
Latin Am II  
French Canadian  
Latin Am I  
Multinational  
Code Page  
850  
IBM PC  
ASCII (USA)*  
EBCDIC  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
* = Factory Default  
Print ENTER to access menus  
1
EMULATION  
(from page 68)  
CTHI  
Standard*  
Simp Prot  
Conv  
1
Coax Params  
SPC Coax  
Params  
Twinax  
Params  
SPC Twx  
Params  
Standard C/T Interface  
With a standard coax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM coax  
printer models:  
3287 Models 1 and 2  
4234 Model 1  
With a standard twinax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM  
twinax printer models:  
4234 Models 2 and 12  
5225 Models 1, 2, 3, and 4  
NOTE: The standard Coax/Twinax emulation selection will only be available  
if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu. See  
For more information, consult the Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference  
Manual.  
Simple Protocol Converter  
The Simple Protocol Converter (SPC) option allows those who use third party  
add-on coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a  
Printronix thermal printer with the Coax/Twinax (CTHI) capability as done  
using a non-CT printer with the third party converter interfaces.  
The SPC replaces the third party add-on protocol converters attached to older  
Printronix thermal printers.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Simple Protocol Converter  
The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC, or  
network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces, and to three different  
IBM host systems:  
System 3x  
AS/400  
3270 Mainframes  
The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax: MODE 219,  
MODE IBM, and MODE P5000.  
The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax  
3287. The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your thermal  
printer: Centronics, serial, coax, and twinax. Also supported are Epson,  
Proprinter, P-Series, Serial Matrix, IGP/VGL, and IGP/PGL emulations.  
The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through  
coax/twinax and parallel and serial interfaces. This is accomplished through  
the Auto Switching feature (see page 78). Because of hardware restrictions,  
coax and twinax cannot be selected together.  
For more information, consult the Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference  
Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Coax Emulation Menu  
* = Factory Default  
CTHI  
Standard*  
Coax Params  
Char Set  
Select  
Translation Tbl  
Active Char  
Set  
PA1  
PA2  
(see next page)  
Buffer Reprint  
Secondary Set*  
Primary Set  
Device ID  
Early Print  
Cmpl  
Cancel  
IGP/DCU  
PTX  
Transparent  
SCS Buffer  
Cntrl  
4234*  
3287  
Disable*  
Enable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Lead-in Chars  
Set 1 <%>*  
Set 2 ¬¬$  
Do not wait*  
Wait until done  
Set 3 _%_  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Printable*  
Control Code  
Change Case  
Set Text  
Orient  
Image Buf Size  
Intervention  
Req  
Compatibility  
Op  
Translate  
Table  
Control By Host*  
Left to Right  
Dual Case*  
Mono Case  
4K  
2K  
Send to Host*  
Do Not Send  
(see page 151) Default*  
Downloaded  
Right to Left  
Host Override  
Format Control  
Max. Print  
Width  
Buffer Print  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
13.2 inches*  
Printer Width  
Disable*  
Enable  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Coax Emulation Menu  
Char Set Select  
* = Factory Default  
Char Set Select  
Primary Sets  
Secondary  
Sets  
0037 English US*  
0037 Eng Nether  
0285 English UK  
0273 Austr/Germ  
0274 Belg. Old  
0275 Brazilian  
0260 Canad Fren  
0277 Danish  
0287 Danish Alt  
0278 Finnish  
0288 Finnish Alt  
0297 French  
0500 Belg. New  
0803 Hebrew Old  
0424 Hebrew  
0892 OCR A  
0893 OCR B  
0420 Arabic  
0880 Cyril. Old  
0423 Greek Old  
0875 Greek New  
0871 Icelandic  
0290 Japan Kata  
0870 Latin 2  
English US*  
English UK  
Austrian/German  
German Alt  
Belgian  
Brazilian  
Canadian French Old Hebrew  
Danish/Norwegian Hebrew  
Portuguese  
Portug. Alt  
Spanish  
Spanish Alt  
Spanish Speak.  
Swiss French/German  
Danish Alt  
Finnish/Swedish  
Finnish Alt  
Farsi/Latin  
Greek Old  
Greek New  
Arabic  
French  
0500 Internat. 5  
0280 Italian  
0838 Thai  
International  
Italian  
Japanese Eng.  
Japanese Katak.  
Turkish  
1026 Turkish  
0890 Yugos. Old  
1097 Farsi  
Turkish Old  
Latin2/ROECE  
Yugoslavian  
0281 Japan. Eng  
0282 Portuguese  
0284 Span Speak  
0289 Span. Alt  
0500 Swiss Bil  
1025 Cyrillic  
0905 Turk. Old  
0256 Intern. 1  
0924 Latin 9  
Specifies the print language used by the printer. Character sets are shown in  
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.  
Translation Table  
Prints out SCS and DSC/DSE tables of the coax interface’s current character  
set. This operation is valid only when the coax interface is selected as the  
current interface (see page 77).  
Active Char Set  
Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active.  
PA1  
PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems  
Network Architecture Character Set (SCS) data stream is active. This function  
displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is pressed and  
sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in  
online mode. Refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual for  
more information about SCS.  
NOTE: Selecting the PA1 menu item again (“PA1 DISABLED” appears on the  
operator panel) or selecting the PA2 menu item will reset the pending  
PA1 function.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
PA2  
PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax SCS data  
stream is active. This function displays the “PA2 ENABLED” message when  
the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host  
when the printer is put back in online mode.  
NOTE: Selecting the PA2 menu item again (“PA2 DISABLED” appears on the  
operator panel) or selecting the PA1 menu item will reset the pending  
PA2 function.  
Buffer Reprint  
This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode. When the  
ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint Enabled” is displayed and an  
Intervention Required status is sent to the host. Pressing ENTER again  
cancels the Buffer Reprint function and “Buffer Reprint Disabled” is displayed.  
Device ID  
This parameter defines the printer emulation, as follows:  
4234  
3287  
After the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host.  
SCS Buffer Control  
Allows the printer to send a print (order) complete status to the host before the  
printer is actually done printing all data. If this parameter is set for Don’t Wait,  
the printer may print at a slightly faster rate. However, if a fault occurs, there is  
the possibility of data loss. This option is valid only when the printer is in SCS  
mode.  
Don’t Wait. The printer notifies the host it is ready for more data as soon  
as the input data buffer has been sent to the print engine.  
Wait Until Done. The printer waits until it has completed printing the  
buffer before notifying the host it is ready for more data.  
Early Print Complete  
Allows the printer to send print (order) complete status to the host before the  
printer is actually done printing all data. This option is valid only when the  
printer is in DSC/DSE mode.  
Disable. The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until  
all printing is complete.  
Enable. The printer will send an acknowledgment to the host when it is  
able to accept more data.  
NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, you  
may lose data.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Coax Emulation Menu  
Cancel IGP/DCU  
Enable. Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or  
when the CANCEL key is pressed.  
Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is  
put on hold from the host, or when the CANCEL key is pressed.  
PTX Transparent Control  
Lead-in Chars  
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through  
standard coax emulations. To access these features, send text commands in  
the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Three sets  
(each containing a start and end code) are available:  
Set 1. start code: <%  
end code: >  
Set 2. start code:¬¬  
end code: $  
Set 3. start code: _%  
end code: _  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.  
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a  
control code.  
Change Case  
Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-  
SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is put  
online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of  
the following “right to left” sets: Katakana, Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi.  
SCS (Systems Network Architecture Character String) Mode is controlled by  
the host computer.  
Set Text Orientation  
Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This  
allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of  
left to right.  
Control By Host. Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the “Set  
Text Orientation” command from the host.  
Left To Right.  
Right To Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be  
notified of print direction changes when the printer is put ONLINE.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Image Buf Size  
Allows you to select 4K or 2K as the image buffer size. This option is only  
valid when printer emulates 3287. For the 4234 emulation, the buffer size is  
fixed at 4K. A POR status is sent to the host when the printer is put online.  
Intervention Req  
Send to Host. The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a  
printer fault or hold mode time-out occurs.  
Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer.  
Compatibility Options  
The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the  
non-SCS mode, based on the capabilities of the printer emulated.  
Compatibility  
Options  
CR at MPP+1  
Position Aft FF Last Char=FF  
(4234 only)  
NL at MPP+1  
Null  
Suppression  
FF Validity  
On*  
Off  
On*  
Off  
Off*  
On  
On*  
Off  
Off*  
On  
Off*  
On  
Auto Skip at  
End  
FF After Job  
CR, EM & NL  
(3287 only)  
Off*  
On  
Off*  
On  
On*  
Off  
CR at MPP+1  
MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This  
option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1.  
On. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line.  
Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.  
NL at MPP+1  
Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.  
On. Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current  
position.  
Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Coax Emulation Menu  
Position Aft FF (4234 only)  
Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed  
command is sent.  
Off. Sets the printer to print at position 2 of the first print line on the next  
form.  
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the  
next form.  
Last Char = FF  
Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code  
encountered in the print buffer.  
On. Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form.  
Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.  
NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.  
If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer,  
the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next  
form, regardless of the setting of this option.  
Null Suppression  
Off. Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.  
On. Treats nulls as spaces.  
FF Validity  
Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution.  
Off. Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line  
or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command at any other  
position is recognized as a space.  
On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the  
data stream.  
Auto Skip At End  
Specifies whether to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print  
buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed  
function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.  
Off. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line.  
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next  
form.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
FF After Job  
Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print  
screen function).  
Off. Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print  
buffer (unless a new line, form feed or carriage return command was the  
last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next  
line.  
On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was  
the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the  
first line on the next form.  
CR, EM, And NL (3287 only)  
CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that  
the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as  
control codes.  
On. Treats the CR, EM and NL commands as control codes.  
Off. Treats the CR, EM and NL commands as spaces.  
Translate Table  
Defines which translate table to use for printing.  
Default. Translates data by using the default table of the current  
character set.  
Downloaded. Translates data from EBCDIC to internal code by using the  
downloaded translate table.  
Host Override  
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,  
or continues to use the current operator panel settings.  
Disable. Allows these host commands to override operator panel  
settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch  
(CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on  
the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values  
will change upon initial selection of the disable option.  
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Coax Emulation Menu  
Format Control  
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after  
absolute and relative move commands are executed.  
Disable. Reflects distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature, IGP/PGL  
feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position  
(after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).  
Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature,  
IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the  
new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).  
Max. Print Width  
Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host  
interface.  
13.2 inches  
Printer Width (the width of the T4204, or 4.10 inches)  
Buffer Print  
Disable. The printer will print normally.  
Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received  
from the host as hex values.  
NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host  
computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print  
from enable to disable.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Twinax Emulation Menu  
* = Factory Default  
CTHI  
Standard*  
Twinax  
Params  
Char Set  
Select  
Translation Tbl  
Active Char  
Set  
Device ID  
Device  
Address  
(see next page)  
Secondary Set*  
Primary Set  
4234-2*  
5225  
1*  
(0-6)  
5225 World  
Trade  
Cancel  
IGP/DCU  
PTX  
Transparent  
Graphic Chek Graphic Chek  
Err  
LAC Option  
Cod  
Standard Char*  
Extended Char  
Enable*  
Disable  
Lead-in Chars Enable*  
60*  
(40-FE hex)  
Enable*  
Disable  
Set 1 <%>*  
Disable  
Set 2 ¬¬$  
Set 3 _%_  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Printable*  
Control Code  
LAC Approx.  
Set Text  
Orientn  
Host Override Format Control  
Max. Print  
Width  
Buffer Print  
On*  
Off  
Control By Host*  
Left to Right  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
13.2 inches*  
Printer Width  
Disable*  
Enable  
Right to Left  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Twinax Emulation Menu  
Char Set Select  
* = Factory Default  
Char Set Select  
Primary Sets  
Secondary  
Sets  
0037 English US*  
0037 Eng Nether  
0500 Swiss Bil  
0500 Belg. New  
0273 Austr/Germ  
0274 Belg. Old  
0275 Brazilian  
0260 Canad Fren  
0277 Danish  
0424 Hebrew  
0803 Hebrew Old  
0420 Arabic  
0880 Cyril. Old  
0423 Greek Old  
0875 Greek New  
0871 Icelandic  
0290 Japan Kata  
0870 Latin 2  
English US*  
Austrian/German  
Belgian  
Brazilian  
Canadian French Farsi/Latin  
Danish/Norweg.  
Finnish/Swedish  
French  
Spanish Speak.  
English UK  
Old Hebrew  
Hebrew  
Greek Old  
Greek New  
Arabic  
Italian  
Turkish  
0278 Finnish  
0297 French  
0280 Italian  
0281 Japan. Eng  
0282 Portuguese  
0284 Span Speak  
0285 English UK  
0892 OCR A  
0838 Thai  
Japanese Eng.  
Japanese Katak.  
Portuguese  
Spanish  
Latin2/ROECE  
Yugoslavian  
Multinational  
1026 Turkish  
0890 Yugos. Old  
1097 Farsi  
1025 Cyrillic  
0256 Intern. 1  
1112 Balt Mult  
0924 Latin 9  
0893 OCR B  
0500 Internat 5  
Specifies the print language used by the printer. Character sets are shown in  
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.  
Translation Table  
Prints out a table of the twinax interface’s current character set. This operation  
is valid only when the twinax interface is the current interface (see page 77).  
Active Char Set  
This option selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will  
be active.  
Device ID  
This parameter defines the printer emulation, as follows:  
4234-2  
5225  
After the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Device Address  
Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data  
and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique  
device address. After the address has been changed, a POR status is sent to  
the host.  
5225 World Trade  
The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as  
a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments.  
Cancel IGP/DCU  
Enable. Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host, or the  
CANCEL key is pressed.  
Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is  
put on hold from the host, or the CANCEL key is pressed.  
PTX Transparent  
Lead-in Char.  
You can enable additional features that are not available in standard Twinax  
emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data  
stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Three sets (each  
containing a start and end code) are available:  
Set 1. start code: <%  
end code: >  
Set 2. start code:¬¬  
end code: $  
Set 3. start code: _%  
end code: _  
Alt. Set 80-9F  
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.  
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a  
control code.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Twinax Emulation Menu  
Graphic Chek Err  
Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action)  
command. For more information about the SGEA command, refer to the  
Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual.  
Enable. The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the SGEA  
command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will stop  
when a graphic error is detected.  
Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not  
stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character  
selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.  
Graphic Chek Code  
Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable  
character that is received from the host. Choose a character from hex 40  
through hex FE. The character becomes the printer default when:  
The printer is powered off and then powered on.  
An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default.  
The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.  
LAC Option  
Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer.  
This may be used for designing graphics, bar codes, and charts, or for printing  
in foreign languages.  
Enable. Prints the LAC character as defined.  
Disable. Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the  
currently selected character set.  
LAC Approx.  
Specifies whether or not to use the LAC Approximation feature. For more  
information about the LAC Approximation feature, refer to theCoax/Twinax  
Programmer’s Reference Manual.  
On. (default) Always converts the emulated character cells to standard  
cells.  
Off. Passes the character data through the printer without conversion.  
Set Text Orientn  
Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This  
allows the printer to print languages that are printed right to left instead of left  
to right.  
Control By Host.  
Left To Right.  
Right To Left.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Host Override  
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,  
or continues to use the current operator panel settings.  
Disable. Allows these host commands to override operator panel  
settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch  
(CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on  
the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values  
will change upon initial selection of the disable option.  
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.  
NOTE: Host margin and tab settings will take precedence, whether or not  
Host Override is enabled.  
Format Control  
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after  
absolute and relative move commands are executed.  
Disable. Reflects distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature, IGP/PGL  
feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position  
(after absolute and relative move commands are executed).  
Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature,  
IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the  
new position (after absolute and relative move commands are executed).  
Max. Print Width  
Set the maximum print width.  
13.2 inches  
Printer Width (the width of the T4204, or 4.10 inches)  
Buffer Print  
Disable. The printer will print normally.  
Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received  
from the host as hex values.  
NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host  
computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print  
from enable to disable.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SPC Coax Params  
SPC Coax Params  
* = Factory Default  
CTHI  
Simp Prot  
Conv  
SPC Coax  
Params  
SPC Type  
Logical Buf  
Size  
Image Buf Size  
Intervention  
Req  
Buffer Print  
PTX NI*  
Avatar Comp  
960  
4K*  
2K  
Send To Host*  
Do Not Send  
Disable*  
Enable  
1920*  
2560  
3440  
3564  
PA1  
Translation Tbl  
SPC Null Supp  
PA2  
Buffer Reprint  
NL @ MPP+1  
Disable*  
Enable  
On*  
Off  
SPC Type  
Avatar Compatible. This option causes the printer to line wrap at 132  
characters despite the current print density allowing more characters per  
line.  
PTX NI (Printronix Non-impact). This option causes the printer to not  
line wrap at 132 characters.  
Logical Buff Size  
Refers to the size of the printer buffer, which should be set the same as the  
host screen (buffer) size. If the host screen size is unknown, use 1920.  
Image Buff Size  
This option refers to the printer base buffer size. This size must be set to a  
value greater than or equal to the Logical Buffer Size.  
Intervention Req  
Send to Host. The printer sends a signal to the host computer when the  
CANCEL key is pressed or a printer fault or hold mode time-out occurs.  
Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
Buffer Print  
Disable. The printer will print normally.  
Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received  
from the host as hex values.  
Translation Tbl  
Prints out a table of the coax interface’s current character set. This operation  
is valid only when the coax interface is selected (see page 77).  
PA1  
PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the OFFLINE state and the coax  
Systems Network Architecture Character Set (SCS) data stream is active.  
This function displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is  
pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is  
put online. Refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual for  
more information about SCS.  
PA2  
PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the OFFLINE state and the coax SCS  
data stream is active. This function displays the “PA2 ENABLED” message  
when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the  
host when the printer is put online.  
Buffer Reprint  
This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode. When the  
ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint Enabled” is displayed and an  
Intervention Required status is sent to the host. Pressing ENTER again  
cancels the Buffer Reprint function and “Buffer Reprint Disabled” is displayed.  
SPC Null Suppression  
Disable. Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.  
Enable. Treats nulls as blank spaces.  
NL at MPP+1  
Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.  
On. Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current  
position.  
Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
SPC Twx Params  
SPC Twx Params  
* = Factory Default  
CTHI  
Simp Prot  
Conv  
SPC Twx  
Params  
Device  
Buffer Print  
SPC Type  
Translation Tbl  
Address  
1*  
(0-6)  
Disable*  
Enable  
Mode PTX NI*  
MODE 219  
MODE P5000  
MODE IBM  
Printer Type  
Impact/P-Series*  
STD Centronics  
IGP/VGL  
SPC Char Set  
0500 Internat 5*  
0037 English US  
0273 Austr/Germ  
0274 Belg. Old  
0275 Brazilian  
0260 Canad Fren  
0277 Danish  
0278 Finnish  
0297 French  
0280 Italian  
0281 Japan. Eng  
0290 Japan Kata  
0282 Portuguese  
0284 Span Speak  
0285 English UK  
SFCC Char  
SPC Char Set  
0500 Internat 5*  
0037 English US  
0273 Austr/Germ  
0274 Belg. Old  
0275 Brazilian  
0260 Canad Fren  
0277 Danish  
0278 Finnish  
0297 French  
0280 Italian  
0281 Japan. Eng  
0290 Japan Kata  
0282 Portuguese  
0284 Span Speak  
0285 English UK  
SFCC Char  
SPC Char Set  
0500 Internat 5*  
0037 English US  
0273 Austr/Germ  
0274 Belg. Old  
0275 Brazilian  
0260 Canad Fren  
0277 Danish  
0278 Finnish  
0297 French  
0280 Italian  
0281 Japan. Eng  
0290 Japan Kata  
0282 Portuguese  
0284 Span Speak  
0285 English UK  
SFCC Char  
IGP/PGL  
SFCC Char  
Logical Not*  
Caret (^)  
User Defined  
Usr Defined HTRN  
Start Code 1 5F*  
(0-FF)  
Start Code 2 5F*  
(0-FF)  
Stop Code 5B*  
(0-FF)  
EVFU  
Enable*  
Set 1 <%>*  
Set 1 <%>*  
Set 1 <%>*  
Disable  
Set 2 ^^$  
Set 2 ^^$  
Set 2 ^^$  
SPC Char Set  
Multinational*  
Austrian/German  
Belgian  
Canadian French  
Danish/Norweg.  
French  
Set 3 _%_  
Set 3 _%_  
Set 3 _%_  
User Defined  
Usr Defined HTRN  
Start Code 1 5F*  
(0-FF)  
Start Code 2 5F*  
(0-FF)  
User Defined  
Usr Defined HTRN  
Start Code 1 5F*  
(0-FF)  
Start Code 2 5F*  
(0-FF)  
User Defined  
Usr Defined HTRN  
Start Code 1 5F*  
(0-FF)  
Start Code 2 5F*  
(0-FF)  
Spanish  
English US  
Stop Code 5B*  
(0-FF)  
Stop Code 5B*  
(0-FF)  
Stop Code 5B*  
(0-FF)  
Device Address  
Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data  
and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique  
device address. After the address has been changed, a POR status is sent to  
the host.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Coax/Twinax Emulation  
SPC Type  
Allows you to select a specific type of Simple Protocol Converter (SPC)  
Twinax emulation. Mode PTX NI is for Coax/Twinax interfaces, MODE 219 for  
Model 219 protocol converter, MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor,  
and MODE IBM for the IBM protocol converter.  
Printer Type  
Determines the SPC Twinax emulation “Mode”. When set to Std Centronics,  
IGP/VGL, or IGP/PGL, the Set Line Density and Set Print Density commands  
are translated into a Carriage Return (CR) and vertical format commands are  
ignored unless the EVFU is enabled.  
SFCC Char  
Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical Not character  
¬ (hex 5F) is received from the host.  
EVFU  
Enable. The EVFU parameter allows vertical format control by the host in  
all four printer type modes.  
Disable. Vertical format control is only allowed in IMPACT/P-SERIES  
mode.  
SPC Char Set  
Allows you to select the print language character set.  
Translation Table  
Prints out a table of the twinax interface’s current character set. This operation  
is valid only when the twinax interface is selected.  
Buffer Print  
Disable. The printer will print normally.  
Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received  
from the host as hex values.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Downloading Software To Flash Memory  
Loading Flash Memory  
Printer emulation and operating system software are loaded into flash  
memory at the factory, but you will install software in some situations:  
You buy the PGL/VGL, or Expansion-C/T option after the printer is  
installed  
You need to upgrade printer software  
You have replaced the printer Controller PCBA  
You have replaced the flash memory SIMM  
Emulation and operating system software are stored as a compressed file on  
3.5 inch floppy diskettes. These files are “executable”—you will expand them  
and copy them into printer flash memory.  
Flash memory is contained in two ICs soldered on to the Controller PCBA,  
and an 80-pin 2MB SIMM at location U38, providing a total of 4MB of flash  
memory for the printer.  
Downloading Software To Flash Memory  
IMPORTANT  
When downloading emulation and operating system software to the  
printer, all other optional font files, customer-supplied logos, setup files,  
and TIFF files will be erased. You will then need to reload those files.  
Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have all the  
necessary files on hand.  
You can download emulation and operating system software through the  
Ethernet, serial, or parallel port of the printer.  
1. If the printer has an Ethernet interface card, refer to your PrintNet User’s  
Manual for download instructions. You are finished with this procedure.  
2. Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Installing new software  
erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore  
printer configuration.)  
3. Set the printer power switch to O (off).  
4. If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of a  
computer capable of running an MS-DOS based PKZIP® self-extracting  
file, go to step 11. If not, go to step 5.  
5. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.  
6. Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interface.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
3
Loading Flash Memory  
7. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data cable to the  
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer that is using the PC-DOS™ or  
MS-DOS operating system.  
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 port is already  
in use. The load commands are different if you use this port, as  
described in the note after step 26.  
8. Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.  
9. Plug the AC power cord into the printer.  
10. Power on the computer.  
11. Create a directory on your computer hard drive where you will store the  
recombined files from the emulation diskettes by typing the following at  
the DOS prompt:  
MD DOWNLOAD<return>  
12. Make the newly created directory the “active” directory by typing the  
following at the DOS prompt:  
CD DOWNLOAD<return>  
13. Insert the last diskette in the series (e.g., 2 of 2, 3 of 3, etc.) into diskette  
drive A (or B) of the computer.  
14. Get the name of the compressed file on the diskette by typing the  
following at the DOS prompt:  
DIR A:<return> (If the diskette is in drive B, type DIR B:<return>)  
The compressed file on the diskette takes the form FILENAME.ZIP,  
where the filename is a six digit number (e.g., 123456.zip).  
15. At the DOS prompt type:  
A:\PKUNZIP A:\FILENAME (Replace A: with B: if you are using the B  
dirve), where FILENAME is the six digit number you noted in the previous  
step.  
16. The PKUNZIP® program will execute, and the following message will  
appear on the computer screen:  
Insert disk #1 - Press a key when ready  
17. Remove the diskette in the disk drive and insert the diskette labeled  
Disk 1 of 2 (or 1 of 3, etc.)  
18. Press the <return> key. After the file is decompressed to the hard drive,  
the following message will appear on the computer screen:  
Insert disk #2 - Press a key when ready  
19. Remove the diskette in the disk drive and insert the diskette labeled  
Disk 2 of 2 (or 2 of 3, etc.)  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Downloading Software To Flash Memory  
20. Press the <return> key. If there are only two diskettes for the emulation,  
you will be returned to the DOS prompt when the decompression is  
complete. If there are three diskettes, you will be asked to insert disk #3  
and press a key.  
21. When all diskettes have been decompressed, type the following at the  
DOS prompt:  
DIR<return>  
You will see a directory listing containing the file FILENAME.EXE, where  
the filename is the six digit number (e.g., 123456.exe) you noted above.  
22. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the PAUSE + FEED  
keys while powering the printer on. Continue holding the PAUSE + FEED  
keys down.  
NOTE: The port default is CENTRONICS; this is the standard load through  
the parallel port. If you want to use the default, continue at step 26.  
23. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD,  
press the < (NEXT) key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD  
PORT=DATAPRODUCT” appears on the LCD.  
24. Press < (NEXT) again to cycle through the download ports available in  
the printer:  
DATAPRODUCT (parallel)  
CENTRONICS* (parallel) (default port)  
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)  
RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)  
RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)  
RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)  
RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)  
RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)  
RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)  
RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)  
25. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,  
press ENTER. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT = <your selection>  
appears on the display.  
26. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD, at  
the DOS prompt on the computer type:  
FILENAME.EXE -pb<return>  
where FILENAME.EXE is the compressed file you noted in step 21. This  
command decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a  
binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
3
Loading Flash Memory  
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, enter  
the following DOS command:  
FILENAME.EXE -pb 2 <Return>  
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of DOS can  
use. The baud rate information entered in the following DOS  
commands must match the selection you made in step 25.  
If you are loading the file through the printer serial port, enter the  
following DOS commands:  
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Return>  
FILENAME.EXE -pbc1<Return>  
27. While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the  
load process and status. (LCD messages are listed in Table 6, page 173.)  
28. When the new program has successfully loaded into memory and the  
printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (off).  
29. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.  
30. Remove the diskette from the computer and store it with the printer.  
31. Power off the computer.  
32. If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 7,  
disconnect it from the computer and printer.  
33. Reconnect the customer’s data input cable(s) to the printer, if required.  
34. Return the printer to normal operation.  
35. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 2, reconfigure the  
printer.  
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory  
Optional font files are stored on 3.5 inch floppy diskettes that contain  
filenames comprised of a part number with a .DWN extension. You will install  
the diskette on your IBM-compatible computer and use either the parallel or  
serial port to download the desired font file(s) to the printer’s flash memory.  
You may load the optional font files through either the serial or parallel port of  
the printer. The load commands are different, depending on the printer port  
you use. These differences are explained within the procedures below.  
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off).  
2. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the  
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer that is using the PC-DOS or  
MS-DOS operating system.  
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the  
LPT1 port is already in use. The load commands are different if you  
use this port, as described in the notes after step 14.  
3. Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I/O port on the  
printer and to the host computer.  
4. Power on the computer and allow it to boot up.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory  
5. Once the computer is booted up, insert the optional font diskette into  
diskette drive A (or B) of the computer.  
6. Make the diskette drive the active drive by typing the following at the DOS  
prompt:  
A:<Return> (if the diskette in drive B, type B:<Return>)  
7. List the contents of the diskette at the DOS prompt by typing the  
following:  
A:\> DIR<Return>  
8. You will view a list of filenames with a .DWN extension on them.  
Example:  
94021.DWN  
94022.DWN  
94023. DWN  
Write down the complete filename with the .DWN extension of each file  
you want to download to the printer.  
NOTE: The numeric portion of the filename will match the numbers of the  
font typefaces listed in Appendix E of the PGL and VGL  
Programmer’s Reference Manuals and provide you with a description  
and print sample of the typeface.  
9. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the PAUSE + FEED  
keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. Continue holding  
the PAUSE and FEED keys down for 5 seconds, then release.  
NOTE: The printer default port is CENTRONICS; if you want to use this port,  
continue to step 14.  
10. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD,  
press the NEXT key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD PORT = RS232-9600”  
appears on the LCD.  
11. Press the NEXT key again to cycle through the download ports available  
in the printer:  
DATAPRODUCT (parallel)  
CENTRONICS* (parallel) (default port)  
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)  
RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)  
RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)  
RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)  
RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)  
RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)  
RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)  
RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)  
DEBUG  
12. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,  
press ENTER. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT” = <your selection>  
appears on the display.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
3
Loading Flash Memory  
13. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD, at  
the DOS prompt on the computer type:  
A:\> COPY /B FILENAME.DWN LPT1 <Return>  
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, type  
the following DOS command:  
A:\> COPY /B FILENAME.DWN LPT2 <Return>  
If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer, type  
the following DOS commands:  
A:\> MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P <Return>  
COPY /B FILENAME.DWN COM1<Return>  
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of DOS can use.  
The baud rate information entered in the above DOS commands must  
match the selection you made in step 12.  
You can download the optional font files one at a time by entering one file  
name per DOS copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy  
command.  
To download one file at a time, enter the following at the DOS prompt, for  
example:  
A:\> COPY /B FILENAME.DWN LPT1<Return>  
To download multiple files, enter the following at the DOS prompt, for  
example:  
A:\> COPY /B FILENAME1.DWN+FILENAME2.DWN+… LPT1<Return>  
NOTE: If you download one file at a time, you will need to cycle power and  
hold the PAUSE + FEED Keys down for each file because the printer  
resets itself after each file. If you have multiple files to download, it is  
recommended that you follow the instructions for downloading  
multiple files.  
14. While the font file is copied into flash memory, the printer LCD informs  
you of the load process and status. (See Table 6 below.) When the new  
file is successfully loaded into memory, the printer will reset itself and go  
Online.  
15. You can verify that the optional fonts have been downloaded, by  
performing a configuration printout or by entering the configuration menu  
and viewing the font files on the LCD. The new files will appear under  
Installed Fonts in the FONT MEMORY menu with the same part number  
file name you selected, but with an AGFA prefix.  
NOTE: The optional font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer control  
panel, they can only be selected via software command from the  
host.  
16. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer Online and return the printer to  
normal operation.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory  
Table 6. Flash Memory Message Guide  
Message  
Explanation  
Required Action  
CLEARING PROGRAM The program successfully loaded into printer None  
FROM FLASH  
RAM and the checksum matched. The old  
program is now being deleted from flash  
memory.  
TESTING HARDWARE Printer status message while downloading.  
PLEASE WAIT  
None  
None  
DIAGNOSTICS  
PASSED  
The printer passed its memory and  
hardware initialization tests.  
ERROR: DC  
PROGRAM  
NOT VALID  
Printer cannot find the data controller  
program or the validation checksum is  
corrupted.  
Download the program  
again: Power off the  
printer and start over at  
9. If the message  
occurs again, replace  
the flash SIMM at U38  
or Controller PCBA.  
ERROR: DRAM AT  
ADDRESS XXXXXXXX location.  
The printer found a defective memory  
Reseat or replace  
DRAM SIMM at U33.  
Replace Controller  
PCBA.  
ERROR: FLASH  
DID NOT PROGRAM  
The printer encountered an error trying to  
program flash memory.  
Download the program  
again: Power off the  
printer and start over at  
9. If the message  
occurs again, replace  
the flash SIMM at U38  
or replace the  
Controller PCBA.  
ERROR: FLASH  
NOT DETECTED  
The printer could not find any flash memory. Reseat or replace Flash  
SIMM at U38. Flash  
SIMM must be present.  
If the message occurs  
again, replace the  
Controller PCBA.  
ERROR: FLASH TYPE The printer does not recognize the type of  
Replace the Flash  
NOT SUPPORTED  
flash memory installed.  
SIMM at U38 with the  
recommended type.  
Contact your authorized  
service representative.  
ERROR: NO DRAM  
DETECTED  
The printer could not find any DRAM.  
Reseat or replace the  
DRAM SIMM at U33. If  
the message occurs  
again, replace the  
Controller PCBA.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter  
3
Loading Flash Memory  
Table 6. Flash Memory Message Guide  
Message  
Explanation  
Required Action  
ERROR: NVRAM  
FAILURE  
The non-volatile memory has failed.  
Replace Controller  
PCBA.  
ERROR: PROGRAM  
NEEDS MORE DRAM  
The printer requires more DRAM memory in Reseat or replace the  
order to run the downloaded program.  
DRAM SIMM at U33. If  
the message occurs  
again, replace the  
Controller PCBA.  
ERROR: PROGRAM  
NEEDS MORE FLASH order to run the downloaded program.  
The printer requires more flash memory in  
Reseat Flash SIMM at  
U38. Replace the Flash  
SIMM. If the message  
occurs again, replace  
the Controller PCBA.  
ERROR: PROGRAM  
NOT COMPATIBLE  
The printer is not compatible with the  
downloaded program.  
Use the correct  
emulation software  
option(s) for this model  
printer.  
ERROR: PROGRAM  
NOT VALID  
The printer does not see a program in flash There is no program in  
memory.  
printer memory. Go to  
step 2.  
ERROR: SECURITY  
PAL NOT DETECTED  
The security PAL is not present or has  
failed.  
Check the security PAL  
at location U11 on the  
Controller PCBA. If the  
PAL is absent, install  
correct PAL. If correct  
security PAL is present,  
replace the Controller  
PCBA.  
ERROR: SHORT AT  
ADDRESS XXXX  
Hardware failure in DRAM or Main PCBA  
controller circuitry.  
Replace U33 DRAM  
SIMM. If message  
occurs with new DRAM,  
replace the Controller  
PCBA.  
ERROR: WRITING  
TO FLASH  
Hardware or software fault in flash memory. Download the program  
again: Power off the  
printer and start over at  
9. If the message  
occurs again, replace  
U38 Flash SIMM or  
Controller PCBA.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory  
Table 6. Flash Memory Message Guide  
Explanation  
Message  
Required Action  
ERROR: WRONG  
CHECKSUM  
The printer received the complete program  
but the checksum did not match. The data  
were corrupted during download.  
Download the program  
again: Power off the  
printer and start over at  
9. If the message  
occurs again, replace  
U38 Flash SIMM or  
Controller PCBA.  
LOADING PROGRAM  
FROM PORT XX%  
The new program is loading into printer  
RAM. XX indicates how much of the  
program has loaded.  
None  
LOADING PROGRAM  
INTO FLASH  
The printer has deleted the previous  
program from flash memory and is loading  
the new program into flash memory.  
None  
RESETTING  
PLEASE WAIT  
The printer finished loading the program into None  
flash memory and is automatically resetting  
itself.  
RESTORING  
BOOT CODE  
Normal download initialization message.  
None  
SECURITY CODE  
VIOLATION  
The software running or being downloaded  
does not match the security PAL code.  
Install the correct PAL  
at U11 or use the  
correct program. (PAL  
and program must  
match.)  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter  
3
Loading Flash Memory  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Interfaces  
Overview  
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The  
printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs  
into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data  
to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can  
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time.  
This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer.  
Standard Host Interfaces:  
Centronics parallel  
IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional  
High Speed Serial Port (RS-232/RS-422)  
Optional Host Interfaces:  
Coax / Twinax  
Ethernet 10Base-T  
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also  
provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel  
interfaces.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
4
Centronics Parallel Interface  
Centronics Parallel Interface  
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not  
exceed 15 feet (5 meters).  
Table 7. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments  
Input Signals  
Output Signals  
Miscellaneous  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
DATA LINE 1  
Return  
2
20  
ACKNOWLEDGE  
Return  
10  
28  
CHASSIS GROUND  
17  
DATA LINE 2  
Return  
3
21  
ONLINE  
Return  
13  
28  
GROUND  
Spares  
30  
14  
DATA LINE 3  
Return  
4
22  
FAULT  
Return  
32  
29  
DATA LINE 4  
Return  
5
23  
PAPER EMPTY  
Return  
12  
28  
No Connection  
+5 Volts  
34,3  
5, 36  
DATA LINE 5  
Return  
6
24  
BUSY  
Return  
11  
29  
18  
DATA LINE 6  
Return  
7
25  
DATA LINE 7  
Return  
8
26  
DATA LINE 8  
Return  
9
27  
DATA STROBE  
Return  
1
19  
PAPER  
INSTRUCTION  
Return  
15  
29  
PRIME  
Return  
31  
30  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals  
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals  
Table 8. Centronics Parallel Interface Signals  
Signals  
Purpose  
Data Lines 1 through 8 Provide eight standard or inverted levels from  
the host that specify character data, plot data,  
or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to  
the extended ASCII character set. You may  
enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8  
parameter on the Centronics Parallel submenu  
(see page 80).  
Data Strobe  
Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from  
the host that clocks data into the printer.  
Acknowledge  
A low true pulse from the printer indicating the  
character or function code has been received  
and the printer is ready for the next data  
transfer.  
Online  
A high true level from the printer to indicate the  
printer is ready for data transfer and the PAUSE  
key on the control panel has been activated.  
When the printer is in online mode, it may  
accept data from the host.  
Paper Empty (PE)  
Busy  
A high true level from the printer to indicate the  
printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault.  
A high true level from the printer to indicate the  
printer cannot receive data.  
Prime  
A high true level from the host to indicate the  
printer should perform a warm start (printer is  
reset to the power-up configuration values).  
Paper Instruction (PI)  
Fault  
Carries a VFU signal from the host with the  
same timing and polarity as the data line.  
A low true level from the printer indicates a  
printer fault.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter  
4
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface  
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface  
The IEEE 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by  
negotiation between the printer and the host.  
Compatibility Mode  
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 7).  
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data  
lines.  
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide  
bidirectional communication.  
Nibble Mode  
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight  
bits are sent over eight data lines.  
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,  
the IEEE 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines.  
(Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over  
the lines.  
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,  
and the host controls the transmission.  
Byte Mode  
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit  
per line).  
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the  
host will take control of the data transfer.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Signals  
Signals  
Table 9 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the  
IEEE 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.  
Table 9. IEEE 1284 Signals  
Type of Mode  
Pin  
Source of Data  
Compatible  
Nibble  
HostClk  
Byte  
1
Host  
nStrobe  
Data 1 (LSB)  
Data 2  
Host/Clk  
2
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Host/Printer  
Printer  
3
4
Data 3  
5
Data 4  
6
Data 5  
7
Data 6  
8
Data 7  
9
Data 8 (MSB)  
nAck  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
PtrClk  
PtrClk  
Printer  
Busy  
PtrBusy  
AckDataReq  
Xflag  
PtrBusy  
AckDataReq  
Xflag  
Printer  
PError  
Printer  
Select  
Host  
nAutoFd  
Not Defined  
Logic Grid  
Chassis Grid  
Host Busy  
HostAck  
Printer  
Peripheral Logic High  
Signal Ground (nStrobe)  
Signal Ground (Data 1)  
Signal Ground (Data 2)  
Signal Ground (Data 3)  
Signal Ground (Data 4)  
Signal Ground (Data 5)  
Signal Ground (Data 6)  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
4
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface  
Table 9. IEEE 1284 Signals  
Type of Mode  
Nibble  
Pin  
Source of Data  
Compatible  
Byte  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
Signal Ground (Data 7)  
Signal Ground (Data 8)  
Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)  
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)  
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)  
nInit  
Host  
Printer  
NFault  
nDataAvail  
aDataAvail  
Not Defined  
Not Defined  
Not Defined  
nSelectIn  
Host  
1284 Active  
1284 Active  
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer  
should not exceed 10 meters (32 feet).  
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer.  
When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble Mode, signal is set  
high. If Byte Mode, signal is set low.  
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility Mode and  
bidirectional in Byte Mode. They are not used in Nibble Mode. Data 1 is the  
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.  
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrupt. Driven by the printer. A signal  
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received  
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.  
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.  
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode.)  
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the  
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble  
Mode.)  
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for  
data transfer and the printer is on-line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble Mode.)  
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates  
auto-line feed mode.  
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the  
printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the  
printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Terminating Resistor Configurations  
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a  
return to Compatibility Mode idle phase.  
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the  
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble Mode.)  
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.  
Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all  
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power  
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.  
nInit —Resets init interface from the host.  
Terminating Resistor Configurations  
The factory equips the printer with terminating resistors that are used for  
parallel interface configurations suitable for most applications. These 470  
ohm pull-up and 1K ohm pull-down terminating resistors are located at RP2  
and RP1 on the Controller PCBA.  
If the values of these terminating resistors are not compatible with the  
particular interface driver requirements of your host computer, you may need  
to install resistors with different pull-up and pull-down values.  
RP1  
RP2  
Figure 6. Resistor Locations  
The shipping kit for this printer includes 220 ohm pull-up and 330 ohm pull-  
down alternate terminating resistors. If you install the 220 ohm pull-up  
resistor, you must also install the 330 ohm pull-down resistor.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
4
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface  
Table 10 lists the three terminating resistor configurations you can install:  
Table 10. Terminating Resistor Configuration  
Configuration  
Pull-Down (RP1)  
Pull-Up (RP2)  
Factory Default  
Alternate 1  
1K ohm  
330 ohm  
none  
470 ohm  
220ohm  
1K ohm  
Alternate 2  
Removal And Installation  
The procedure for removing and installing terminating resistors is provided in  
your Maintenance Manual.  
IMPORTANT  
This is an involved maintenance procedure; only a trained technician  
should perform this procedure.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RS-232  
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces  
NOTE: The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interface circuit characteristics are  
compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications  
EIA®-232-E and EIA-422-B.  
The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit  
serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial  
data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer’s control panel. Baud  
rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200  
baud rates are available.  
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to  
use RS-422 to prevent data loss. You may also need to increase the  
Buffer Size in K parameter from the default (1 Kbyte), to improve  
performance.  
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not  
exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232 or 4000 feet (1220 meters) for RS-422.  
(A copper conductor, twisted-pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of  
16 pF/foot [52.5 pF/meter] terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be  
used for the RS-422.)  
RS-232  
Table 11. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments  
Input Signals  
Output Signals  
Miscellaneous  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Receive Data (RD)  
3
5
Transmit Data (TD)  
2
4
Chassis Ground  
Signal Ground  
1
7
Clear To Send (CTS)  
Request To Send  
(RTS)  
Data Set Ready  
(DSR)  
6
8
Data Terminal Ready  
(DTR)  
20  
Data Carrier Detect  
(DCD)  
Received Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.  
Transmitted Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting  
status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.  
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to  
configuration.  
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready  
to receive data/status signals from the printer.  
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a  
ready condition.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter  
4
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is  
required for the printer to receive data.  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to  
configuration.  
RS-422  
Table 12. RS-422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments  
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous  
Signal  
Signal  
Pin  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
- Receive Data  
(-RD)  
15  
- Transmit Data  
(-TD)  
19  
Chassis Ground  
1
+ Receive Data  
(+RD)  
17  
+ Transmit Data  
(+TD)  
25  
Signal Ground  
7
+RD, -RD—Serial data stream differentially received by printer.  
+TD, -TD—Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and  
control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.  
NOTE: ±RD and ±TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
Diagnostics And  
Troubleshooting  
Printer Self-Test  
A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power-up. If any  
faults are detected at that time, an error message will display (see page 194).  
Printer operation should also be verified before setting the printer for online  
operation. This is done by running the printer internal self-test diagnostic  
program, which will produce a selection of printed test labels. See Chapter 3,  
The Test Print program can be enabled from the printer through the TEST key  
on the Primary Control Panel or through the Secondary Control Panel  
Diagnostics menu and provides the capability for printing a variety of test  
pattern labels.  
NOTE: Before attempting to print test labels, the printer must be properly set  
up for the type of media installed. (See the Printer Control menu  
Printing Test Labels  
The printer has a built-in function that prints a selected number of test labels  
or test patterns. The patterns are useful for isolating printer faults and  
checking print quality.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Occasionally, situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill.  
Possible problem situations and potential solutions are listed in this section.  
While not every conceivable situation is addressed here, you may find some  
of these tips helpful. Contact a qualified service technician for problems that  
persist or are not covered in this section.  
Improving Processing Time  
Before looking at solutions for decreasing processing time and increasing  
throughput, it may help to understand what happens during processing. When  
the printer receives a format command, it enters the label formatting mode.  
Label formatting requires time to process the label data into the printer  
buffers.  
The time required varies, depending on the complexity of the label format and  
on the size of the area being printed. Once the data has been mapped into  
memory, the printer will start printing as many labels as requested by the  
quantity command. In most cases, there is no delay between labels; however,  
there are certain situations that may cause delays between label printing:  
Using the cutter option:  
The printer must stop and wait for the cutter to execute the cutting cycle.  
Using Automatic Label Peel-Off or Tear-Off media handling:  
The printer stops between each label and waits for the label to be  
removed.  
Data Exchange  
Many things can cause data loss or communications problems. This section  
suggests some ways to isolate these problems and determine their cause.  
Handshaking  
Handshaking is the exchange of signals between two computers (or a  
computer and a peripheral input or output device) to indicate the status of the  
data being transferred. In the serial mode, the printer uses both hardware and  
software handshaking and transmits both forms simultaneously when the  
input buffer is full.  
The printer can be used with either serial or parallel host interfaces. Parallel  
interfaces are usually straightforward, with no special settings required. Serial  
interfaces, however, have a variety of possible communication parameter  
settings. The two methods of handshaking that can be used, hardware and  
software, are explained below.  
Hardware Handshaking  
These electrical signal are controlled by the logic states on pins 4 and 20  
of the serial interface connector J2 (at the back of the printer).  
The signals will go either low or high, depending on the configuration  
setting, when the printer is ready to receive data.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Data Exchange  
The signals will go either low or high, depending on the configuration  
setting, when the printer is in the busy state, which indicates that the  
printer input buffer is full and can no longer receive data.  
Software Handshaking  
XON and XOFF are software signals that control serial data flow between  
the printer and the host system. When the printer input buffer is full, the  
printer transmits an XOFF (CTRL S) character that signals the host to  
stop sending data. When memory space becomes available in the input  
buffer, the printer sends an XON (CTRL Q) character, which tells the host  
that the printer is ready to receive more data.  
If the printer appears to have communication problems, the self-test  
configuration test labels and character hex dump modes should be checked.  
The tests can help identify printer configuration errors that can cause  
problems.  
Both of these test procedures are covered in this chapter. Configuration items  
to check include the following:  
Check that the data string being sent to the printer contains the correct  
information.  
Verify that the correct host interface port is being used and that the  
communication parameters match those of the host (i.e., baud rate,  
parity, etc.).  
Verify that the correct interface cable is installed between the host and the  
printer.  
Interfacing  
The printer will not function properly with an incorrectly wired cable or the  
wrong interface cable installed. If the cable is suspect, contact Printronix or  
your authorized service representative.  
When the printer is first powered up, it will reset itself to the communication  
default parameters. The parameters are listed in the following table:  
PARAMETER  
Baud  
DEFAULT VALUE  
9600  
Data Bits  
Parity  
8
NONE  
1
Stop Bits  
The printer configuration settings may be entered through the main menu  
HOST INTERFACE function, which is accessed through the secondary  
control panel. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring the Printer” for complete  
instructions.)  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Controlling Print Quality  
Two factors have the greatest effect on print quality:  
The amount of heat applied by the printhead (print intensity)  
The speed at which media is moving under the printhead (print speed)  
For example, low-cost direct thermal media often have very high reaction  
temperatures, which means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear  
image. Resin ribbons and film media may also require higher print intensity for  
a quality image.  
The printer provides two ways to increase the heat:  
Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host or the  
PRINTER CONTROL menu.  
Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function,  
accessed via the host or through the PRINTER CONTROL menu. This  
causes more heat to be transferred into the media, thereby generating a  
darker image.  
Also, the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign  
material does not accumulate on the printhead and interfere with heat  
transfer. If smears, voids or white lines appear in the printed form, the  
printhead should be cleaned with a printhead cleaning pen or a cotton swab  
moistened with isopropyl alcohol (see Figure 7).  
The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a  
new ribbon (thermal transfer mode) or when you install new media (direct  
thermal mode).  
Figure 7. Cleaning the Printhead  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Other Printer Problems  
Other Printer Problems  
Smears or voids in printed image  
Possible causes include:  
Dirty printhead. Clean the printhead, as described in the previous  
section.  
Printhead temperature is too high. Use software control to adjust the  
heat setting or change the Print Intensity value through the PRINTER  
CONTROL menu. This function is accessed through the secondary  
control panel. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring The Printer,” for complete  
instructions.)  
Incorrect ribbon/media combination is being used. Be sure to use the  
correct ribbon type. The use of genuine Printronix Supplies is highly  
recommended to ensure the best possible print quality.  
The ribbon has a crease or fold across the surface. Smooth out the  
ribbon to remove the crease. Perform the Ribbon Wrinkle adjustment  
procedure in the T4204 Maintenance Manual. Reduce the Print  
Speed setting using the PRINTER CONTROL menu. You can access  
the menu through the secondary control panel. (See Chapter 3,  
“Configuring The Printer,” for complete instructions.)  
Advances several labels when FEED button is pressed  
Possible causes include:  
Labels were loaded incorrectly. Refer to the loading instructions on  
the inside cover of the printer, or see “Loading Roll Media” on page  
The PRINTER CONTROL menu Page Length value is set greater  
than the actual length of the Transmissive or Reflective media  
currently installed.  
The media sensor is not horizontally positioned directly under the  
Transmissive notch or hole, or if Reflective media is installed, the  
media sensor is not positioned under the black stripe.  
The Run Calibrate procedure was never performed.  
The media sensor is out of adjustment or defective. Call your  
authorized Printronix service representative.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Prints strange characters instead of the correct label format  
Possible causes include:  
Printer serial baud rate setting does not match the host baud rate.  
Reset the printer via software, or turn the printer off and then on.  
Printer serial host interface set for 8 data bits but the transmitting  
device is set for 7 data bits (or vice-versa). The current setting may be  
viewed on the front-panel message display and new settings may be  
entered through the main menu HOST INTERFACE function.  
This is accessed through the secondary control panel. (See Chapter  
3, “Configuring The Printer,” for complete instructions.)  
Printer advances media, but ribbon does not advance  
Possible causes include:  
Ribbon Supply spindle has jammed.  
The ribbon is not attached to the cardboard tube on the take-up  
spindle.  
A bad ribbon/media combination is resulting in insufficient friction  
between media and ribbon. Verify that the correct ribbon is being  
used.  
Ribbon broke, but portion of ribbon is covering the ribbon sensor,  
preventing a RIBBON FAULT error message.  
Print quality is good but printer skips every other label  
Possible causes/solutions include:  
The label is formatted too close to the top edge of the form. Leave  
white space equal to eight dot rows at the top of the label.  
Slightly reduce the Page Length value in the PRINTER CONTROL  
menu.  
Enable the PRINTER CONTROL menu Clip Page.  
The Logical Page Length is greater than the Physical Page Length.  
The Host Forms Length value is greater than the Physical Page  
Length.  
Print is light on right side of label  
Possible causes include:  
Media width adjustment cam is set for a narrower width than the width  
of the media being used.  
The platen is worn on the right side.  
Printhead dirty.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Other Printer Problems  
Printer fails to turn on.  
Possible causes include:  
Faulty AC wall outlet.  
Faulty AC cord.  
Blown fuse. Call your authorized Printronix service representative.  
Bad printer power switch. Call your authorized Printronix service  
representative.  
With the LCD Message Display indicator illuminated, the  
printer appears to be working, but nothing is printed.  
Possible causes/solutions include:  
Verify that the labels are the correct type (direct thermal).  
Check that the roll is loaded with the direct thermal side facing up.  
Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed and has the ink side  
out.  
Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by pressing  
down on both sides of the assembly.  
Check that the PRINTER CONTROL menu Print Intensity is set to the  
correct value.  
Check that PRINTER CONTROL menu Page Width value does not  
exceed the media width installed.  
Printing is faded or poor quality.  
Possible causes/solutions include:  
Clean the printhead with a cleaning pen or a cotton swab soaked in  
alcohol.  
Adjust print speed and intensity in software.  
Verify that the PRINTER CONTROL menu Print Speed and Intensity  
are correct.  
Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by pressing  
down on both sides of the assembly.  
Verify that the media and ribbon are the proper match.  
Verify that the correct side of the media is facing the printhead.  
Printing stops and ONLINE status indicator flashes.  
Possible causes/solutions include:  
Possible problem with label gap sensor.  
Possible problem with label stock. Gap between the bottom of a label  
and the top of the next label should be at least 1/8 inch. Use only  
Printronix approved labels and tags.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Possible label jam.  
Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed correctly.  
Possible software problem.  
Printer cuts (melts) through the transfer ribbon. The ribbon is  
advancing at the same rate as the label stock.  
Possible causes/solutions include:  
Verify that the software has set the printing heat setting to the proper  
level.  
Verify that the PRINTER CONTROL menu Print Intensity value is set  
to the correct value.  
ONLINE status light is flashing.  
Possible causes/solutions include:  
Check for Out-of-Media condition or missing labels in the middle of a  
roll.  
Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed.  
Printer Alarms  
The printer has built-in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock  
conditions. Alarm messages display indicating the present status of the  
printer and media stock levels. The alarms also indicate if the printer  
electronics detect an error condition.  
Fault Messages  
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control  
panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault.  
Fault messages are summarized in Table 13.  
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:  
Operator correctable  
Field service required  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Fault Messages  
Operator-Correctable Fault Messages  
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action  
under the solution section of the table. After correcting the displayed fault,  
press the CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator and  
resume printing. If the fault message reappears, contact your authorized  
service representative.  
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and  
procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the  
procedures described there must be performed only by your  
authorized service representative.  
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention  
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an  
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is  
needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized  
service representative:  
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the  
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not  
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.  
2. If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message goes  
away, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the  
message reappears, call your authorized service representative.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Table 13. LCD Message Troubleshooting  
Can  
Displayed Message  
User  
Explanation  
Solution  
Correct?  
BUFFER OVERFLOW Yes  
Host sent data after the  
printer buffer was full.  
(serial interface)  
Check your serial host interface  
parameter settings; if  
necessary, change them so  
they match the settings of the  
attached host.  
BUFFER OVERRUN  
Yes  
Receive overrun. (serial  
interface)  
Check your serial host interface  
parameter settings; if  
necessary, change them so  
they match the settings of the  
attached host.  
CONFIG DOES NOT Yes  
EXIST/SAVE FIRST  
Attempt was made to  
Load, Print, Delete or use sub-menu of the CONFIG.  
Enter the Save Config.  
a configuration as the  
Power-Up Config. when  
the configuration was  
never saved.  
CONTROL menu and save the  
desired configuration using  
configurations 1-8 or a named  
config.  
CUTTER FAULT  
Check Cutter  
Yes  
1. Cutter option was not  
able to complete a full  
cut cycle due to a jam.  
1. Clear obstruction from cutter  
assembly.  
2. Wait a few minutes for cutter  
circuit breaker to  
2. Cutter PCBA detected  
current overload and  
opened circuit breaker  
on cutter PCBA.  
automatically reset.  
Press CLEAR to clear the  
fault message and resume  
printing.  
EC SOFTWARE FAIL* Yes  
See Manual  
Engine control software  
failure.  
Cycle power to the printer.  
If problem persists, contact your  
authorized service  
representative.  
FILE EXISTS  
Enable Overwrite  
Yes  
Attempt was made to  
save a file using an  
Enter the File System sub-menu  
of the MAINT/MISC menu and  
existing stored file name. enable the Overwrite Files  
feature to overwrite the existing  
file.  
FILE SYSTEM FULL  
Delete Files  
Yes  
Yes  
Insufficient Flash memory Enter the File System sub-menu  
available to store file.  
of the MAINT/MISC menu. Use  
Delete to delete unwanted files.  
FILE SYSTEM FULL  
Optimize & Reboot  
Insufficient Flash memory Enter the File System sub-menu  
available to store file.  
of the MAINT/MISC menu and  
use Optimize & Reboot feature.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Fault Messages  
Table 13. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)  
Can  
Displayed Message  
User  
Explanation  
Solution  
Correct?  
FILE SYSTEM FULL  
Add Flash  
Yes  
Insufficient Flash memory Contact your authorized service  
available to store file.  
representative.  
FRAMING ERROR  
Yes  
Serial framing error.  
(serial interface)  
Check your serial host interface  
parameter settings. If  
necessary, change them so  
they match the settings of the  
attached host.  
GAP NOT  
DETECTED  
Check Media  
Yes  
Printer is set for  
Transmissive or  
Reflective sensing, but a  
gap, notch, or stripe is not  
being detected.  
1. Check to see that the media  
installed matches the media  
sensor selected in the Config.  
menu.  
2. Clean the sensor assembly  
and paper path.  
3. Perform the Run Calibrate  
procedure described in this  
manual to improve sensors  
ability to detect the media in  
use.  
Trans Value is set too low  
or Refl Value is set to  
high.  
4. Manually enter a new Trans  
of Refl value in the Calibrate  
submenu.  
LABEL PRESENT  
Remove Label (see  
note)  
Yes  
1. This is the normal  
message when Peel-off  
or Tear-off Media  
Handling has been  
selected.  
1. Remove the label from the  
front of the printer to allow the  
next label to print.  
2. Change the Media Handling  
selection to the correct  
option.  
2. Label detected at front  
of the printer by the  
Label Taken Sensor.  
Label Taken Sensor  
gate is in the down, or  
enabled, position.  
3. Select Tear-off Strip or  
Continuous to prevent the  
printer from stopping for label  
removal after each label is  
printed.  
3. Incorrect media  
handling method is  
selected.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Table 13. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)  
Can  
Displayed Message  
User  
Explanation  
Solution  
Correct?  
LOAD PAPER  
Yes  
The printer does not  
sense media.  
1. Install new media.  
2. Re-install media through the  
paper path.  
1. Media was not installed  
or has run out.  
3. Check the media installation  
procedures beginning on  
2. A break in media has  
occurred.  
3. Media was not routed  
or installed correctly.  
4. Perform the Run Calibrate  
procedure described in this  
manual to improve sensors  
ability to detect the media in  
use.  
4. Media is installed  
correctly, but the  
Transmissive or  
Reflective sensor is not 5. Manually change the value  
detecting it.  
(Trans or Refl) of media for  
media in use.  
5. Trans Value may be  
set too high or Refl  
Value may be set to  
low.  
OPTION NOT  
INSTALLED  
Yes  
Cut option was selected  
in Media Handling menu  
and printer has detected  
a fault.  
1. Install cutter option or select  
the correct Media Handling  
option in the configuration  
menu.  
1. Cutter option is not  
installed or is  
2. Connect cutter assembly  
cable.  
disconnected while the  
Cut option is selected  
in Media Handling.  
3. Connect cutter PCBA to  
Controller PCBA cable.  
2. Cable from cutter  
assembly to cutter  
PCBA is not  
connected.  
3. Cable from cutter  
PCBA to Controller  
PCBA is not  
connected.  
PARITY ERROR  
Yes  
Parity error. (serial  
interface)  
Check your serial host interface  
parameter settings. If necessary  
change them so they match the  
settings of the attached host.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fault Messages  
Table 13. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)  
Can  
Displayed Message  
User  
Explanation  
Solution  
Correct?  
xxx  
Yes  
Sensed Printhead  
This is a printer protection  
P/H Control Mode  
temperature is 55° to  
59°C causes a 50%  
reduction in print speed.  
This mode dramatically  
extends the time before a  
PRINT HEAD HOT fault  
would occur and permits  
long print jobs to  
feature, but the time before the  
printer reaches the P/H Control  
Mode may be extended by:  
1. Placing the printer in a cooler  
temperature environment.  
2. Cleaning the printhead more  
frequently between jobs.  
3. Reducing the Print Speed.  
4. Reducing the print intensity.  
complete without  
interruption. Printing  
stays in this mode until  
head temperature drops  
below 52°C where full  
speed printing resumes,  
or until head temperature  
reaches 60°C where  
printing stops with a  
PRINT HEAD HOT fault  
message displayed.  
5. Extending the idle time  
between print jobs.  
6. Reducing the amount of black  
image density per print job.  
7. If problem persists, contact  
your authorized service  
repersentative.  
POWER SUPPLY  
VOLT*  
No  
Power supply failed.  
Contact your authorized service  
representative. Check 5A 250V  
fuse on power supply. Replace  
if necessary. Replace the power  
supply assembly.  
NOTE: Do not press the FEED key with the "LABEL PRESENT Remove Label" message  
displayed or the message will be removed, until the PAUSE key is pressed. Also, each  
pressing of the FEED key will cause a blank label to be added at the end of the print job.  
PRINT HEAD HOT  
See Manual  
Yes  
The printhead has  
become overheated.  
1. Allow the printhead to cool  
down for 5 minutes, then  
press CLEAR. Resume  
printing.  
2. If problem persists, contact  
your authorized service  
representative.  
RIBBON DETECTED Yes  
In Direct Mode  
Printer senses ribbon  
installed, but Print Mode  
is set for Direct thermal  
printing (printing where  
no ribbon is required).  
1. Remove the ribbon from the  
printer if Direct Thermal  
media is being used.  
2. Change the Print Mode from  
Direct to Transfer if thermal  
transfer printing is being  
used.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter  
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations  
Table 13. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)  
Can  
Displayed Message  
User  
Explanation  
Solution  
Correct?  
RIBBON FAULT  
Check Ribbon  
Yes  
Ribbon not detected by  
ribbon sensor.  
1. Install new ribbon.  
2. Re-attach the ribbon to the  
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle.  
1. Ribbon is not installed  
or has run out.  
3. Check the ribbon installation  
procedures on page 38.  
2. A break in the ribbon  
has occurred.  
3. Ribbon is not routed or  
installed in the ribbon  
path correctly.  
SOFTWARE ERROR* Yes  
Recycle Power  
1. Application software  
tried to perform an  
1. Recycle printer power. If  
possible, print a job that has  
previously worked.  
illegal printer function.  
2. There are damaged  
logic circuits on the  
Controller PCBA.  
2. If problem persists, contact  
your authorized service  
representative.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A
Specifications  
Printing  
Type:  
Direct thermal or thermal transfer  
203 dots per inch (8.0 dots/mm)  
2 to 6 ips (inches per second)  
Resolution:  
Print Speed:  
Bar Code Modulus:  
10 mil to 127 mil “X” dimension in picket or  
ladder orientation.  
Maximum Print Width:  
Maximum Print Length:  
4.09 inches (103.9 mm)  
47 inches using maximum 4.09 inch print width.  
Reducing the print width extends the maximum  
print length up to 99 inches.  
Minimum Print Length:  
.500 inches  
White Space Slew Rate: 2 to 6 inches per second  
Minimum Dot Size:  
Label Backfeed:  
.0033 inches (0.083 mm) square  
For label dispensing modes and optional media  
cutter  
Fonts:  
Resident Fonts:  
Courier Bold, Triumvirate Bold Condensed, and  
Letter Gothic scaleable outline fonts and bit-  
mapped OCR-A, OCR-B.  
Optional Fonts:  
A wide selection of scaleable outline  
proportional and monospace fonts is available.  
Font Expansion:  
Bar Codes:  
All fonts expandable vertically and horizontally.  
Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 128 (subsets  
A, B, and C), Codabar, UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC 2-  
& 5-digit addendums, EAN-8, EAN-13, EAN 2- &  
5-digit addendums, Code 93, MSI Plessey,  
UPCSHIP (IGP/VGL only), UCC 128, Postnet,  
PDF 417 (IGP/PGL only), FIM.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A  
Media:  
Type:  
Roll-fed, die-cut continuous or fan-fold labels,  
tags or tickets; most direct thermal or thermal  
transfer materials.  
Supply Roll:  
8 in. (203 mm) maximum diameter on 3” (76  
mm) diameter cores.  
7 in. (178 mm) maximum diameter on 1" (25  
mm) diameter cores.  
Internal Rewinder:  
Label Material:  
Accepts a 5 inch diameter roll of labels or label  
backing.  
Thermal transfer plain-coated papers, vinyl,  
Mylar®, metallized paper, non-woven fabric, fine  
woven fabric, thermal-visible light scannable  
paper, infrared scannable paper, thermal ticket/  
tag stock, thermally sensitive plastic stock.  
Thermal Transfer  
Ribbons:  
Standard Widths are:  
1.00” (25mm)  
1.57” (40mm)  
2.36” (60mm)  
3.15” (80mm)  
4.33” (110mm)  
Media Sensing:  
Moveable “see-through” for die-cut labels and  
reflective for tags with black striping.  
The T4204 printer uses a movable sensor to  
detect index holes/notches or the black stripe in  
tag stock. The Transmissive sensor position is  
indicated by the sensor crystal at the front of the  
label guide that is visible with the printhead  
open. The Reflective sensor position is located  
under the R2, far right side resistor, also visible  
with the printhead open. The sensor can be  
moved by squeezing the two locking tabs,  
located under the label guide, and sliding the  
sensor assembly in or out. For proper sensing,  
ensure that the sensor is aligned with the center  
portion of the index hole/notch or black stripe.  
Label Taken Sensor:  
Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit  
throat.  
Automatic Label  
Peel-Off:  
Peels and presents label to the operator, one at  
a time.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Label/Tag Media Specifications  
Front of Printer  
Direction of Media Motion  
T4204  
Description  
Max (in.)  
Min (in.)  
A
B
C
Label width  
4.50  
1.12  
1.12  
0.118  
Backing width  
4.50  
Gap between labels or  
length of sensor opening  
0.512  
1
D
Label Length  
47.0  
0.500  
.0025  
2
E+F  
Media thickness  
0.010  
G
H
Width of sensor opening None  
0.236  
0.250  
Edge of media to edge of 1.654  
sensor opening distance  
I
Reflective sensor mark  
width  
4.00  
1.000  
0.500  
J
Distance between  
47.0  
reflective mark trailing  
edge to trailing edge  
K
Reflective sensor mark  
length  
47.0  
0.118  
1. 0.750 inches using Peel-Off Media Handling.  
2. 0.006 inches using the Media Cutter option (Cut Media Handling).  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Lists Of Approved Media  
For a current list of approved standard media for use in Printronix thermal and  
thermal transfer label printers, please call Printronix at (800) 733-1900 or FAX  
(714) 368-2354. Further information can be obtained by calling the Printronix  
Thermaline Help Desk at (714) 368-2488 or from the Printronix Web Page at  
http://www.printronix.com.  
Indicators And Switches  
Indicator Lights:  
Switches:  
Keys:  
ONLINE  
POWER  
PAUSE, FEED, CANCEL, TEST, CLEAR, PRT  
CONFIG, JOB SELECT, ENTER, UP, DOWN,  
PREV, NEXT  
Message Display:  
2-row 16-characters per row for error messages,  
print status, and recalling stored formats  
Host Interfacing  
1. Serial RS-232 or RS-422 at 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,  
38400, 57600, or 115200 baud.  
2. Parallel (Centronics compatible) or IEEE 1284 bi-directional.  
3. Coax/Twinax (optional).  
4. Ethernet 10 Base - T (optional)  
The RS-232 and RS-422 host interfaces shall have the following  
characteristics:  
ANSI® ASCII character set  
Character Set:  
Word Length:  
Handshaking:  
Input Buffer:  
Selectable 7-bit or 8-bit data format  
XON/XOFF (in receive mode only) and RTS/DTR  
Selectable from 1k through 16 kbytes.  
Electrical:  
Power Source:  
Circuit Protection  
Grounding:  
115 or 230 VAC 50/60Hz switching power supply.  
One T6.3-amp, 250V Time-Lag fuse.  
Unit must be connected to a properly grounded  
receptacle.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory:  
Flash Memory  
(standard)  
2MB soldered on Controller PCBA and 2MB 80-  
pin SIMM at location U38 on Controller PCBA  
DRAM (standard)  
4MB 72-pin SIMM at location U33 on Controller  
PCBA  
Environmental:  
Operating:  
40° F to 104° F (4° C to 40° C)  
-40° F to 150° F (-40° C to 60° C)  
20% to 85%, non-condensing  
Free air movement  
Storage Temperature:  
Humidity:  
Ventilation:  
Dust:  
Non-conducting, non-corrosive  
Physical:  
Dimensions:  
Weight:  
12.2” H x 9.5” W x 17.0” D  
31 pounds  
Options:  
Media Cutter:  
Automatically cuts printed media with maximum  
thickness of 0.006 inches (0.153 mm). Certain  
types of media are excluded. The cutter should  
not be used to cut through the adhesive portion  
of a label.  
Label/Tag Catcher  
Tray:  
Used with the Media Cutter option to catch the  
cut media and collect it away from the Media  
Cutter Assembly.  
Coax/Twinax  
Interface:  
Provides protocol converter functionality and  
connectivity for IBM coax/twinax host interfaces  
PrintNet Server  
Available in Ethernet 10Base-T configuration.  
(Optionally in 10Base2) configuration. Allows  
placing the T4204 on a LAN rather than attaching  
it directly to a host system.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Printer Options  
A comprehensive series of options is offered with the printer to enhance its  
capabilities and to provide a large degree of application flexibility. A  
description of the option complement is given below. For field-installable  
options, installation instructions are provided with each option.  
Hardware Options  
Media Cutter  
The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed (for cutting tags  
and labels), or the option can be installed by an authorized service  
representative at a later date. When properly installed, the printer can be  
configured to automatically cut media after each label is printed or via the  
software command to cut media after a specified number of labels is printed.  
Label And Tag Catcher Tray  
This option is used exclusively with the media cutter option to slide cut labels  
or tag stock away from the media cutter and collects them a safe distance  
away. This option is field installable by the operator.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Hardware Options  
Interface Options  
Coax/Twinax Host Interface  
The coax/twinax host interface option functions as a protocol converter to  
allow the direct connection of the printer to an IBM host computer that uses  
either a coax or a twinax data interface. This option should be installed only  
by an authorized service representative.  
PrintNet 10Base2 (BNC) (Externally Mounted)  
Permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it directly to a host  
system. It connects externally to the T4204 Centronics parallel port. Only  
Ethernet is supported. This option is field-installable by the operator.  
PrintNet 10Base-T (UTP) (Externally Mounted)  
Permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it directly to a host  
system. It connects externally to the T4204 Centronics parallel port. Only  
Ethernet is supported. This option is field-installable by the operator.  
PrintNet 10Base-T (UTP) (Internally Mounted)  
Permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it directly to a host  
system. It is mounted inside the printer. Available as a factory option only. Not  
supported if the Coax/Twinax option is installed.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons  
Supplies And Accessories  
The best printing solution is achieved when the printer, ribbon, and media are  
matched to the application requirements. The use of Genuine Printronix  
Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image quality, consistent  
bar code performance, and extended life of the printhead.  
Please refer to the Printronix Media Selection Guide for details concerning the  
application suitability for all Media and Ribbon products. To obtain a copy of  
this Guide, or for any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal  
Supplies, please call:  
Americas:  
(800) 733-1900  
Fax: (714) 368-2354  
Europe, Middle East,  
Africa:  
(33) 1-46-25-1900  
Fax: (33) 1-47-28-9993  
Asia:  
(65) 548-4116  
Fax: (65) 546-1588  
Or visit our website at www.printronix.com.  
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons  
The following is a list of Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer ribbons:  
Printronix Economy Wax Ribbon 5200  
Excellent image quality, especially on coated thermal transfer papers.  
Printronix Prime Wax Ribbon 5400  
Excellent high speed print quality with premium durability performance on a  
wide range of thermal transfer receptive papers and films.  
Printronix Premium Resin Ribbon 5600  
Excellent image scuff resistance while achieving premium print quality on a  
wide range of synthetic films and coated papers.  
Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Ribbon 5700  
Highest heat, chemical, and abrasion resistance for use with high-end  
synthetic facestocks. Meets UL/CSA regulatory requirements when used with  
the proper Polyester media.  
All ribbons are available in widths of: 1.00 inch (25mm), 1.57 inches(40mm),  
2.36 inches (60mm), 3.15 inches (80mm), and 4.33 inches (110mm).  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Supplies And Accessories  
Genuine Printronix Media  
Printronix provides a wide variety of sizes, colors, and shapes of labels and  
tags readily available to meet all of your labelling needs. The Printronix  
Expanded Die Library details hundreds of label sizes and configurations  
which are quickly obtainable through the Printronix custom order system  
without the typical added costs and delays associated with the creation and  
tooling of a special die to match your requirements.  
Genuine Printronix ThermaLine Media  
ThermaLine  
Base Material  
Application  
Thermal  
Media Type  
Media 110  
Premium Paper Label  
Transfer  
Media 120R  
Media 180T  
Premium Paper Label, Removable  
Adhesive  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Premium Thermal Transfer Tag  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Media 210  
Media 220  
Media 270IR  
Premium Paper Label  
Direct Thermal  
Direct Thermal  
Direct Thermal  
High Sensitivity, Premium Label  
Infra-Red Scannable, Premium Paper  
Label  
Media 280T  
Media 410  
Media 510  
Premium Paper Tag (card stock)  
Premium Polyolefin Label  
Direct Thermal  
Direct Thermal  
Semi-Gloss Polyolefin Label  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Media 520  
Media 710  
Media 730  
Media 750  
“Smudge-Proof” Polyolefin Label  
White Polyester (2 mil) Label  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Matte Chrome Polyester (2 mil) Label  
Bright Chrome Polyester (2 mil) Label  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Thermal  
Transfer  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Genuine Printronix Media  
Besides the standard roll label configuration, Genuine Printronix ThermaLine  
labels are also available in fanfold configurations.  
Media  
(Stock)  
Typical  
Applications  
Type  
Ribbon  
Not Used  
Features  
Low cost.  
Direct Thermal  
Paper Label  
Tag  
Shipping.  
Inventory Tracking.  
Ease of use.  
Synthetic  
Label  
Low environmental  
durability.  
Limited label life.  
Will fade and/or discolor  
when exposed to heat,  
sunlight, or chemicals.  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Paper Label  
Tag  
Printronix  
Economy Wax  
Lowest cost thermal  
transfer combination.  
Most commonly used.  
Low environmental  
durability.  
Shipping.  
Inventory Tracking.  
Product Labelling.  
Compliance  
Labeling.  
Low abrasion resistance.  
Longer life than direct  
thermal.  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Paper Label  
Tag  
Synthetic  
Label  
Printronix  
Prime Wax  
Mid-range wax resin  
performance and  
characteristics at economy  
wax prices.  
Same as economy  
applications with  
advantage of  
supporting  
®
Darker, razor-sharp,  
smudge-proof images.  
Polypropylene,  
Polyethylene,  
Polyolefin, and  
Valeron media.  
Tyvek and  
®
Valeron  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Paper Label  
Tag  
Synthetic  
Label  
Printronix  
Premium  
Resin  
Better environmental  
durability.  
Better abrasion resistance  
than wax.  
More expensive than wax.  
Good aesthetic  
Retail applications  
where labels are  
handled.  
Excellent for most  
applications.  
Compliance  
appearance.  
Labelling.  
Thermal  
Transfer  
Synthetic  
Label  
Printronix  
Harsh  
Environment  
Resin  
High environmental  
durability.  
High physical durability.  
Excellent aesthetic  
appearance.  
High temperature  
environments.  
Medical  
applications.  
Outdoor  
Most expensive label/tag  
combination.  
environments.  
Environments with  
chemicals.  
Compliance  
labelling.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Supplies And Accessories  
Accessories  
Field installable accessories available for the T4204 printer are listed below.  
Always refer to the Printronix part number when placing an order.  
Description  
Media Cutter, T4204  
Part Number  
750884-901  
750904-001  
Label and Tag Catcher Tray (used with a Media  
Cutter option)  
Coax/Twinax Host Interface option  
PrintNet 10Base2, option  
750851-001  
750886-001  
750885-001  
750514-001  
171278-001  
750513-001  
750515-001  
750516-001  
750557-001  
750517-001  
164300-001  
164129-001  
PrintNet 10Base-T, option  
User’s Manual  
Quick Reference Manual  
Maintenance Manual  
LP+ Programmer’s Reference Manual  
IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual  
IGP/VGL Programmer’s Reference Manual  
PrintNet User’s Manual  
C/T Programmer’s Reference Manual  
Printronix Printer Manager User’s Manual  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Setting The Page Length  
Observe the following considerations when you set the Page Length value  
(the length of the leading edge to the trailing edge of the label) in the Printer  
Control menu, or set the Host Forms Length via host software:  
When using continuous media (no gaps, notches, holes, or black marks),  
the physical page length will be based on the Page Length value in the  
Printer Control menu or the Host Form Length value sent via host  
software. The user selected page length will dictate what the physical  
length will be.  
When using non-continuous media (with gaps, notches, holes, or black  
marks) the Physical Page Length is established by the distance between  
the trailing edge of the gap, notch, hole, or black mark.  
Logical Page Length, also refered to as the printer control page length or  
the Host Form Length, is usually the same measurable length as the  
Physical Page Length, but it can be programmed to be greater or less  
than the physical length of the label material installed on the printer. This  
results in the image being clipped off, moved to the next physical page, or  
having a blank space on the remaining portion of the physical page.  
In the default case any form or page length sent from an emulation (the ^L  
or ^H command in VGL and the length defined within the ~CREATE  
statement in PGL) will be used to force the page length.  
The media sensors (Transmissive or Reflective) are used to detect the  
Top-of-Form position, based on the trailing edge of the gap, notch, hole,  
or black mark. If the page length you have selected (either from the  
secondary control panel or through the host) does not match the physical  
page length, then the printer will attempt to map the logical page onto the  
physical page.  
If the logical page length is less than the physical page length, the printer will  
leave white space at the end of the label so that the next logical page will start  
at the beginning of the next physical page. If the user-selected (logical) page  
length is greater than the physical page length, the printer will clip the page to  
fit onto the physical page when the Clip Page option is enabled under the  
Printer Control menu. In this case, the printable data that was not printed is  
lost. With Clip Page disabled, the remaining printable data would be printed  
starting at the Top-of-Form position on the next page, after a paper advance.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C  
The following recommendations indicate how best to set up the printer and  
use the media sensor.  
If the application sends the logical page length to the printer, then there is  
probably nothing to change in the setup other than to enable the proper  
media sensor. The printer and the application will use the Host Form  
Length for the logical page length. As long as the physical page length is  
really the same as the logical page length (which it should be), the printer  
will operate normally.  
If the application sends the logical page length to the printer but it is  
inaccurate (e.g., you wish to fit two logical pages onto one physical page),  
then you must make sure that Host Form Length is set to Disabled and  
must also set the Page Length under the Printer Control menu in the  
secondary control panel to the physical page length.  
If the application does not send the page length to the printer, then you  
must select the page length from the secondary control panel. This value  
must be accurate, both in terms of what the application expects and the  
physical page length. If it does not match the physical page length, then  
there will be clipping or extra white space.  
The Page Length range is limited to 47.0 inches (1193.8mm) when the  
Page Width value is set to 4.1 inches. Decreasing (narrowing) the Page  
Width value will extend the limits of the Page Length range that you can  
select—up to a maximum of 99.0 inches.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
ASCII Control Codes  
Char  
Dec  
Hex  
00  
Char  
Dec  
32  
Hex  
20  
Char  
Dec  
64  
Hex  
40  
Char  
Dec  
96  
Hex  
60  
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
EXT  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
0
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
1
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
!
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
a
b
c
d
e
f
97  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
2
+
#
$
%
&
+
(
98  
3
99  
4
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
5
6
7
g
h
i
8
HT  
9
)
LF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
*
J
j
VT  
+
,
K
L
k
l
FF  
CR  
-
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
m
n
o
p
q
r
SO  
.
SI  
/
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
;
<
\
|
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
Char  
GS  
Dec  
29  
Hex  
Char  
Dec  
61  
Hex  
Char  
Dec  
93  
Hex  
Char  
Dec  
Hex  
7D  
1D  
1E  
1F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
=
>
?
á
í
3D  
3E  
3F  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
AA  
AB  
AC  
AD  
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
]
5D  
5E  
5F  
}
125  
126  
127  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
RS  
US  
Ç
ü
30  
62  
^
94  
~
7E  
7F  
E0  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
EA  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
EF  
F0  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
FE  
FF  
31  
63  
_
95  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
CA  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CE  
CF  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
DA  
DB  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
+
_
+
+
_
+
é
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
â
ä
à
å
_
+
ç
_
¿
«
ê
_
+
_
+
_
_
ë
è
ï
1/2  
1/4  
¡
î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
_
+
+
+
+
_
@
#
3/4  
ö
ò
+
+
+
_
1
û
+
+
_
ù
ÿ
º
Ö
Ü
°
¿
I
»
£
+
x
¢
¥
+
_
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: For the hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:  
XON = Ctrl Q (DC1)  
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E Glossary  
Baud (rate)  
Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can  
be transmitted between the printer and the computer  
in one second. For example, one baud equals one bit  
per second in a series of binary signals. Both the  
printer and the computer must be configured to the  
same baud rate.  
BIT  
Binary digIT. A digit in the binary number system,  
represented by a 0 or a 1. A bit is the smallest unit of  
storage in a digital computer.  
Boot-up  
Buffer  
The start-up procedure which causes a computer  
operating system to be loaded into main memory.  
An area of storage into which data are read or written  
temporarily during data transfers.  
Coax  
Coaxial cable. A type of cable with a single wire  
surrounded by insulation and a braided shield.  
Configuration  
Refers to the operating properties that define how the  
printer responds to signals and commands received  
from the host computer at the printer interface. These  
properties are called configuration parameters and  
are set to match the operating characteristics of the  
host computer system.  
Continuous Media  
Media comprised of one continuous length without a  
gap, notch, hole or black mark to establish a  
predetermined label or tag length. With this media  
type, the Host Form Length or user selected Page  
Length sets the desired length of each label.  
Controller  
Data Bits  
Default  
An independent functional logic unit in a data  
processing system that controls data paths between  
one or more units of peripheral equipment.  
Binary information sent to the printer; a character set  
grouping containing letters, digits, and punctuation  
marks to be printed.  
A value, parameter, attribute, or option that is  
assigned by a program or system when another has  
not been specified by the user.  
Diagnostic  
Pertaining to the detection and isolation of a printer  
malfunction or mistake.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
E
Glossary  
Direct Thermal Media  
Media coated with special chemicals that act as an  
accelerator, acceptor dye and binder. In Direct  
Thermal mode the heat from the selected rectangular  
elements in the thermal printhead makes direct  
contact with the media (no ribbon is used) and  
causes a chemical reaction that creates the image on  
the media.  
Direct Thermal Printing A printing method in which no ribbon is used to  
transfer data from the printhead to the media to  
create an image. The thermal printhead selectively  
heats small rectangular elements which make direct  
contact with the coated media.  
DRAM  
Dynamic Random Access Memory. Can be read  
from or written to at any time. DRAM is volatile:  
Whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned  
off.  
EPROM  
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory.  
Programs, instructions, and routines permanently  
stored in the printer that cannot be written to. Files in  
EPROM are not lost when power is turned off.  
(Resident fonts are fonts permanently stored in  
EPROM and available at any time, via software  
commands.)  
Fanfold Media  
Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll  
format.  
Flash Memory  
Font  
Nonvolatile memory. See Nonvolatile Memory.  
A collection of printing characteristics for printing  
alphanumeric characters, all of which combine to  
produce a distinctive style of print.  
Host Computer  
The computer that stores, processes, and sends  
data to be printed, which communicates directly with  
the printer. The term “host” is used to indicate the  
controlling computer, since modern printers are  
themselves microprocessor-controlled computer  
systems.  
Interface  
The hardware component used to link two devices by  
common physical interconnection, signal, and  
functional characteristics.  
IPS  
The speed at which the media is printed based on a  
rate of Inches-Per-Second. The T4204 can print at 2,  
3, 4, 5 and 6 IPS.  
Label Liner (backing)  
The material labels are attached to during their  
manufacturing process. Attachment is usually  
accomplished with an adhesive.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
After printing, labels can be easily removed from the  
liner and the liner discarded or recycled.  
Label Taken Sensor  
A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect  
the presence of a label positioned under it. The  
sensor is used only during Peel-Off and Tear-Off  
Media Handling to sense a label and then detect its  
removal prior to printing the next label.  
Media  
Material onto which data is printed by the printer. The  
types of media supported by the printer are die-cut  
labels or tagstock, supplied in roll or fanfold format.  
Media is further described by the type of sensing  
used to detect the Top of Form position of its  
predetermined length. Transmissive media uses a  
liner gap, notch or hole between labels and  
Reflective media uses a horizontal black mark  
located on the back of the tagstock or label liner.  
Continuous media uses no sensing method and the  
operator determines which label length is desired.  
Media Cutter  
Media Sensor  
An optional device attached to the front of the printer  
that cuts the media after it is printed into individual  
labels or after a specified number of labels.  
The assembly used to detect the presence of media  
in the paper path, as well as, the gap, notch, or hole  
position of Transmissive media or the horizontal  
black mark on Reflective media.  
Memory  
See RAM, Nonvolatile Memory, DRAM, and Flash  
Memory.  
Nonvolatile Memory  
Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be  
preserved when the printer is turned off, such as  
configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.  
Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is  
housed on the controller board, which contains an  
independent, battery-operated power supply. When  
printer power is turned off, the battery supplies the  
power needed to keep stored data active. Nonvolatile  
memory also includes storage in disk.  
NOVRAM  
Acronym of Nonvolatile Random-Access Memory.  
See Nonvolatile Memory.  
Parity (check)  
Parity checking is the addition of a non-data bit to  
data, resulting in the number of “1 bits” being either  
always even or always odd. Parity is used to detect  
transmission errors. Parity represents value in the  
check digit of the received or transmitted data.  
PCBA  
Printed Circuit Board Assembly. A PCB with  
components (ICs, resistors, capacitors, etc.)  
installed.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Glossary  
Port  
A data channel used for receiving data from or  
transmitting data to one or more external devices.  
Protocol  
The rules and conventions that govern  
communication between a printer and a host  
computer. A protocol includes codes for printing text  
and graphics and codes instructing the printer to  
perform special operations.  
RAM  
Random-Access Memory. Also called "main  
memory" or "working memory". It is the active  
memory of the printer, into which programs are  
loaded. RAM is saved to volatile memory because  
data in RAM is lost when power is turned off or  
interrupted.  
Resolution  
Roll Media  
A measure expressing the number of component  
units in a given range used to create an image; in  
printing, expressed as the number of dots per inch  
(dpi) horizontally and vertically.  
Media supplied in a roll format, usually wound on a 1  
inch or 3 inch cardboard core. The T4204 media  
support assembly accepts both core sizes.  
Slew  
Rapid vertical paper movement.  
Stop Bits  
The signal which indicates the end of a character or  
element.  
Thermal Transfer Media Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon for  
image transfer. In Thermal Transfer mode,  
compatibility between the ribbon and the media is  
critical in producing a high quality long lasting image.  
Thermal Transfer Printing A printing method in which the printhead presses a  
specially coated ribbon against the media. The  
printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond  
the image to the media.  
Twinax  
Twinaxial. A type of cable with two wires surrounded  
by insulation and a braided shield.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Byte mode, 180  
Numerics  
C
1284 Parallel interface, 180  
20 CPI Condensed, 143, 146  
5225 World Trade, 160  
Cable length  
Centronics parallel interface, 178  
IEEE 1284 parallel, 182  
RS-232 interface, 185  
RS-422 interface, 185  
serial, 185  
A
Acknowledge signal  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
Activating Font Memory Options, 98  
Active Char Set, 151, 159  
Active IGP EMUL Menu, 67  
Active IGP Emul menu, 67  
Calibrate, 95  
Calibrating  
Transmissive and Reflective Sensors, 48  
Calibration Procedure, 49  
Cancel IGP/DCU, 153, 160  
Centronics  
Alarms  
printer, 194  
acknowledge signal, 179  
Buffer Size in K, 81  
Alt. Set 80-9F, 134  
Alternate Set 80-9F, 140  
Auto Label Map Examples, 73  
Auto Uppercase, 106  
Autoeject, 106  
Busy on Strobe, 81  
busy signal, 179  
Data Bit 8, 80  
data lines 1 through 8 signals, 179  
Data Polarity, 80  
Autowrap, 105  
data strobe signal, 179  
interface signals, 179  
Latch Data On, 81  
B
Bar codes, 17  
online signal, 179  
Barcode Options, 108  
Paper Empty signal, 179  
Paper Instruction (PI) signal, 179  
parallel interface, 178  
PI Ignored, 80  
Baud Rate, 84  
BUFFER OVERFLOW fault message, 196  
BUFFER OVERRUN fault message, 196  
Buffer Reprint, 152, 164  
Buffer Size in K, 85  
pin assignments, 178  
Prime Signal, 81  
Response Polarity, 81  
TOF Action, 81  
Busy signal  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu, 80  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change Case, 153  
D
Changing Printer Settings, 56  
Char Set Select, 151, 159  
Characters  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal  
RS-232 serial interface, 186  
Data exchange, 188  
Data lines 1 through 8 signal  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
Data Protocol, 82  
strange, 192  
Clear To Send (CTS) signal  
RS-232 serial interface, 185  
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 173, 175  
Clip Page, 96  
Data Set Ready (DSR) signal  
RS-232 serial interface, 185  
Data strobe signal  
Coax Emulation Menu, 150  
Coax/Twinax Emulation, 148  
Communication  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
Data Terminal Ready, 85  
Define CR Code (Carriage Return), 105  
Define LF Code (Line Feed), 105  
Delete Config., 66  
Centronics parallel, 178  
Dataproducts Long Lines, 178  
IEEE 1284 parallel (bidirectional), 180  
Compatibility Mode  
IEEE 1284 interface, 180  
Compatibility Options, 154  
Compressed Print, 137  
CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST/SAVE FIRST fault  
message, 196  
Device Address, 160, 165  
Device ID, 152, 159  
DIAGNOSTICS, 100  
Diagnostics menu, 100  
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 173  
Downloading Software, 167  
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu, 65  
Config. Control menu, 65  
Configuration  
E
Modifying Saved, 59  
Early Print Complete, 152  
EC SOFTWARE FAIL fault message, 196  
Printing, 60  
Sample Printout, 62  
Saving, 57  
Emulation  
Configuration Menu  
Coax Menu, 150  
Moving Within, 53  
Coax/Twinax, 148  
Moving Within (ill.), 55  
IGP/PGL, 102  
Configuring the Printer, 51  
Configuring the VGL with the Control Panel, 113  
IGP/VGL, 112  
LinePrinter Plus, 124  
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX, 145  
LinePrinter Plus ProPrinter XL, 142  
LinePrinter Plus P-Series, 132  
LinePrinter Plus Serial Matrix, 139  
Twinax, 158  
Controlling print quality, 190  
CPI/LPI Select, 127  
CR Edit, 106  
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter fault message, 196  
Emulation Menu Options, 68  
Emulation Menu Options menu, 68  
Error Handling, 119  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages  
See Fault messages  
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot fault  
message, 196  
Error Recovery, 96  
Ethernet  
Flash Memory  
Buffer Size in K, 89  
ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu, 90  
Ethernet Parameters menu, 90  
Ethernet Submenu, 89  
EVFU Select, 133, 137  
Examples  
Flash messages  
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 173,  
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 173  
ERROR  
DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 173  
DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 173  
FLASH NOT DETECTED, 173  
NO DRAM DETECTED, 173  
NVRAM FAILURE, 174  
Auto Label Map, 73  
Exchange  
Extended Execute Copy, 107  
PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 174  
PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 174  
PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 174  
PROGRAM NOT VALID, 174  
SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 174  
SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 174  
WRITING TO FLASH, 173, 174  
WRONG CHECKSUM, 175  
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 175  
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 175  
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 175  
Font Attributes, 127  
F
Fault message  
BUFFER OVERRUN, 196  
CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST/SAVE FIRST, 196  
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter, 196  
EC SOFTWARE FAIL, 196  
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite, 196  
FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash, 197  
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files, 196  
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot, 196  
FRAMING ERROR, 197  
Font Memory menu, 97  
GAP NOT DETECTED Check Media, 197  
LABEL PRESENT Remove Label, 197  
LOAD PAPER, 198  
Font Memory Menu Options, 97  
Font Memory Options  
Activating, 98  
OPTION NOT INSTALLED, 198  
PARITY ERROR, 198  
Font Options, 121  
POWER SUPPLY VOLT, 199  
Format Control, 157, 162  
PRINT HEAD HOT, 199  
FRAMING ERROR fault message, 197  
RIBBON DETECTED In Direct Mode, 199  
RIBBON FAULT Check Ribbon, 200  
SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power, 200  
Fault messages, 194  
G
GAP NOT DETECTED Check Media fault  
message, 197  
FF Valid at TOF, 143  
Gothic Typeface, 137  
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite fault message, 196  
FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash fault message, 197  
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files fault message,  
GP/VGL Emulation, 112  
Graphic Chek Code, 161  
Graphic Chek Err, 161  
Graphics Options, 116  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interfacing, 189  
H
Intervention Req, 154, 163  
Handshaking, 188  
hardware, 188  
K
software, 189  
Key Function, 52  
Hor Image Shift, 94  
Host Form Length, 109  
HOST INTERFACE, 77  
Host Interface menu, 77  
Host Override, 156, 162  
L
LABEL PRESENT Remove Label fault message,  
Labels  
printing test, 187  
I
LAC Option, 161  
Idle Response, 86  
IEEE 1284  
LinePrinter Plus  
Emulation, 124  
Buffer Size in K, 88  
interface, 180  
Epson FX Character Set Menu, 147  
Epson FX Emulation, 145  
ProPrinter XL Emulation, 142  
P-Series Emulation, 132  
P-Series XQ Emulation, 136  
Serial Matrix Emulation, 139  
Submenus, 125  
operating modes, 180  
Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 88  
Prime Signal, 88  
signals, 182  
TOF Action, 88  
Ignore / DB8 Setup, 119  
Ignore Character, 110  
IGP 100 Compatibility, 110  
IGP/PGL Character Set Menu, 111  
IGP/PGL Character Sets menu, 111  
IGP/PGL Emulation, 102  
IGP/PGL Features, 102  
IGP/PGL Submenu, 104  
IGP/VGL Character Set Menu, 123  
IGP/VGL Character Sets menu, 123  
IGP/VGL Submenu, 114  
Image  
Load Config., 65  
LOAD PAPER fault message, 198  
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 175  
Logical Buff Size, 163  
M
MAINT / MISC, 69  
Maint/Misc menu, 69  
Max Cache Memory, 98  
Max Cache Size, 99  
Max Cached Char, 99  
Max Char Memory, 98  
Max Fonts Loaded, 99  
Max. Print Width, 157, 162  
Media Handling, 94  
Media selection, 16  
Media Sensor, 93  
printed, smears or voids in, 191  
Image Buf Size, 154  
Image Buff Size, 163  
Improving processing time, 188  
Interface  
Menu  
Standard C/T, 148  
Active IGP Emul, 67  
Config. Control, 65  
Diagnostics, 100  
Interface Type, 82  
Interfaces, 177  
Centronics parallel, 178  
Dataproducts Long Lines, 178  
IEEE 1284, 180  
Emulation Menu Options, 68  
Ethernet Parameters, 90  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Font Memory, 97  
N
O
Host Interface, 77  
Name Configs., 66  
Nibble mode, 180  
IGP/PGL Character Sets, 111  
IGP/VGL Character Sets, 123  
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX Character Sets  
LinePrinter Plus Epson FX Character Sets  
One Char Enquiry, 86  
Online signal  
Maint/Misc, 69  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
OPTION NOT INSTALLED fault message, 198  
Options  
Printer Control, 91  
ProPrinter XL Character Sets  
ProPrinter XL Character Sets menu, 144  
P-Series Character Sets, 135  
Serial Matrix Character Sets, 141  
Twinax Emulation, 158  
fonts, 17  
hardware, 17  
twinax/coax host interface, 17  
Orientation, 126  
Menu Navigation, 51  
Overstrike, 133, 140  
Overview, 51  
Menu Options, 65  
Selecting, 55  
P
Messages  
CLEARING PROGRAM / FROM FLASH, 173  
DIAGNOSTIC / PASSED, 173  
ERROR  
Page length  
DC PROGRAM / NOT VALID, 173  
DRAM AT / ADDRESS XXXXXX, 173  
FLASH / DID NOT PROGRAM, 173  
FLASH / NOT DETECTED, 173  
NO DRAM / DETECTED, 173  
NVRAM / FAILURE, 174  
Paper Empty (PE) signal  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
Paper Feed Shift, 94  
Paper Instruction (PI) signal  
Centronics interface, 179  
Parallel interfaces  
PROGRAM / NEEDS MORE DRAM, 174  
PROGRAM / NEEDS MORE FLASH, 174  
PROGRAM / NOT COMPATIBLE, 174  
PROGRAM / NOT VALID, 174  
SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 174  
SHORT AT / ADDRESS XXXX, 174  
WRITING / TO FLASH, 174  
WRONG / CHECKSUM, 175  
LOADING PROGRAM / FROM PORT XX%,  
Centronics, 178  
Parity, 84  
PARITY ERROR fault message, 198  
PGL Normal, 109  
PI Control, 121  
PI Slew Range, 105  
Pin assignments  
Centronics parallel interface, 178  
Plot Attributes, 129  
LOADING PROGRAM / INTO FLASH, 175  
RESTORING / BOOT CODE, 175  
SECURITY CODE / VIOLATION, 175  
Modifying Saved Configurations, 59  
Poll Character, 85  
Poll Response, 86  
Power On IGP/PGL, 107  
POWER SUPPLY VOLT fault message, 199  
Power-Up Config., 66  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print  
quality, controlling, 190  
Print Config., 66  
R
Received Data (RD) signal  
RS-232 serial interface, 185  
RS-422 serial interface, 186  
Report Status, 79  
PRINT HEAD HOT fault message, 199  
Print Intensity, 93  
Request to Send, 85  
Print Mode, 93  
Request To Send (RTS) signal  
RS-232 serial interface, 185  
Reset Cfg Names, 66  
Print Speed, 92  
Print Statistics, 101  
Printer, 15  
Resistors  
alarms, 194  
configuration, 183  
Dynamic Print Control, 15  
emulations, 16  
installation, 184  
removal, 184  
features, 16  
Resolution, 121  
hardware options, 17  
interfaces, 177  
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 175  
Ribbon  
not turning on, 193  
not advancing, 192  
problems, 191  
RIBBON DETECTED In Direct Mode fault  
message, 199  
self-test, 187  
skips labels, 192  
RIBBON FAULT Check Ribbon fault message, 200  
RS-232 serial interface  
Clear To Send (CTS), 185  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 186  
Data Set Ready (DSR), 185  
Received Data (RD), 185  
Request To Send (RTS), 185  
Transmitted Data (TD), 185  
RS-422 serial interface  
received data (RD), 186  
transmitted data (TD), 186  
the printing process, 15  
Printer Control menu, 91  
Printer Control Menu Options, 91  
Printer Protocol, 126  
Printer Select, 140, 146  
Printer Settings  
Changing, 56  
Printer Tests, 100  
Printing a Configuration, 60  
Printing test labels, 187  
Problems, 191  
S
Processing time  
improving, 188  
Sample Configuration Printout, 62  
Save Config., 65  
Proprinter XL Character Set Menu, 144  
Protect Configs., 66  
P-Series Character Set Menu, 135  
P-Series Character Sets menu, 135  
PTX Transparent, 160  
PTX Transparent Control, 153  
Saving New Configurations, 57  
Secondary Control Panel, 52  
Using, 53  
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 175  
Select Font, 106  
Q
Select LPI, 106  
Selecting a Menu Option, 55  
Quality  
print, controlling, 190  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-test  
printer, 187  
Serial  
Baud Rate, 84  
Standard C/T Interface, 148  
Stop Bits, 84  
Submenu  
Centronics(Parallel), 80  
IGP/PGL, 104  
Buffer Size in K, 85  
Data Protocol, 82  
IGP/VGL, 114  
Data Terminal Ready, 85  
Idle Response, 86  
LinePrinter Plus, 125  
System Memory, 101  
Interface Type, 82  
T
One Char Enquiry, 86  
Parity, 84  
Tear-Strip Time, 96  
Terminating resistor configuration, 183  
Test labels  
Poll Character, 85  
Poll Response, 86  
printing, 187  
Request to Send, 85  
Stop Bits, 84  
Time  
processing, improving, 188  
Timeout, 79  
Word Length, 84  
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu, 141  
Serial Matrix Character Sets menu, 141  
Serial Submenu, 82  
Translate Table, 156  
Translation Table, 151, 159, 166  
Translation Tbl, 164  
Set Text Orientation, 153  
Set Text Orientn, 161  
SFCC & Pwrup, 114  
Signals  
Transmitted Data (TD) signal  
RS-232 serial interface, 185  
RS-422 serial interface, 186  
Trickle Time, 78  
Centronics parallel interface, 179  
IEEE 1284 interface, 182  
Simple Protocol Converter, 148  
Skip Command Prefix, 107  
Slash 0, 106  
Troubleshooting, 188  
Twinax Emulation Menu, 158  
Twinax Emulation menu, 158  
Twinax/coax host interface, 17  
U
Slew Relative, 138  
SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power fault  
message, 200  
Upper Case Select, 137  
V
Software handshaking, 189  
Ver Image Shift, 94  
SPC Coax Params, 163  
SPC Twx Params, 165  
SPC Null Suppression, 164  
W
Word Length, 84  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTRONIX  
14600 MYFORD ROAD  
P.O. Box 19559  
IRVINE, CA 92606-1005  
PHONE: 714-368-2000  
FAX: 714-368-2600  
PRINTRONIX  
NEDERLAND BV  
P.O. BOX 163, NIEUWEWEG 283  
NL-6600 AD WIJCHEN  
THE NETHERLANDS  
PHONE: 31-24-6489489  
FAX: 31-24-6489499  
PRINTRONIX Schweiz GmbH  
42 CHANGI SOUTH STREET 1  
CHANGI SOUTH INDUSTRIAL ESTATE  
SINGAPORE 486763  
PHONE: 65-542-0110  
FAX: 65-543-0220  
Visit our website at:  
www.printronix.com  
750514-001E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Peavey Music Mixer PV 8 User Manual
Pelco Camera Lens 13FF12D User Manual
Pelco Car Amplifier C6505M0 User Manual
Pelco Home Security System C1420M H User Manual
Philips Beverage Dispenser 32PFL3409 93 User Manual
Philips DVD VCR Combo MX5100VR 05 User Manual
Philips Electric Shaver 4414LC User Manual
Philips Headphones SBCHE590 User Manual
Philips MP3 Docking Station AJ301DB 79 User Manual
Planar Computer Monitor LB1500R User Manual